instructions to bidders

Transcription

GENESEE COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM 200, COUNTY ADMINISTRATION BLDG.
1101 BEACH STREET
FLINT, MICHIGAN 48502
TELEPHONE (810) 257-3030
FAX (810) 257-3380
ERIC F. HOPSON
Purchasing Director
June 5, 2012
GENESEE COUNTY INVITATION FOR BIDS #12-015
Sealed bids will be received until 9:00 a.m. (EDT), Monday, June 18, 2012, at the Genesee
County Purchasing Department, 1101 Beach Street, Room 200, Flint, MI, 48502 for GENESEE
COUNTY FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS.
A mandatory pre-bid meeting and site inspection will be held on Wednesday, June 6,
2012, at 3:00 p.m. (EDT), in the HR Training Room, Ground Floor, Genesee County
Administration Builidng, 1101 Beach Street, Flint, MI 48502.
Full Scale Plan Sets may be obtained by cash or check, none of which will be refunded, at
Gwyer Reprographics, Inc., 8226 Embury Rd., Grand Blanc, MI, 48439, Ph.: (810) 695-9500 or
Email: [email protected].
Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond or cashier’s check in the amount of five (5)
percent of the amount bid, drawn payable to Genesee County, as security for the proper
execution of the Agreement.
Each bidder is responsible for labeling the exterior of the sealed envelope containing the bid
response with the bid number, bid name, bid due date and time, and your firm’s name. The
bid request number and due date for this IFB are:
DUE DATE:
IFB NUMBER:
MONDAY, JUNE 18, 2012 @ 9:00 AM (EDT)
#12-015
Eric F. Hopson
ERIC F. HOPSON, PURCHASING DIRECTOR
bid2\2012\12-015
Attachments
GENESEE COUNTY IS AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
IFB #12-015
1
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Division 00 -- Procurement and Contracting Requirements
00 01 01 - Project Title Page
Notice of Invitation for Bids
00 01 10 - Table of Contents
00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders
00 42 01 - Proposal Form
00.43.36 - Proposed Subcontractors Form
00 80 00 - Supplementary General Conditions
Appendix A - Genesee County Insurance Checklist
Appendix B - Genesee County Standard Terms and Conditions
Appendix C - Genesee County Major Contract Addendum
SPECIFICATIONS
Division 01 -- General Requirements
01 10 00 - General Requirements
01 10 01 - Substitution Request Form
01 10 02 - Contractor Certification of Asbestos-Free Products
01 10 04 - Electronic File Transfer Policy
01 10 05 - Bulletin Pricing Format
01 10 06 - Request for Information (RFI) Form
01 33 01 - Submittal Summary
01 33 02 - Certificate of Compliance
01 33 03 - Certificate Summary
01 41 01 - Prevailing Wage Rates
Division 02 -- Existing Conditions
02 41 00 - Demolition
02 82 06 - Asbestos Abatement
02 82 07 - Certification of Post-Abatement Visual Inspection
Division 03 -- Concrete
A.
03 01 00 - Maintenance of Concrete
Division 04 -- Masonry
04 01 01 - Masonry Tuck Pointing
Division 05 -- Metals
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites
Job #09270
Copyright THA 043012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 1
06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework
06 42 16 - Wood-Veneer Paneling
Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing
07 84 00 - Firestopping
07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
Division 08 -- Openings
08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames
08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors
08 33 13 - Coiling Counter Doors
08 56 59 - Bullet Resistant Transaction Window
08 71 00 - Door Hardware
08 71 01 - Door Hardware Schedule
08 80 00 - Glazing
08 88 56 - Ballistics Resistant Glazing
Division 09 -- Finishes
09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring
09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting
09 72 00 - Wall Coverings
09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
Division 10 -- Specialties (NOT USED)
Division 11 -- Equipment (NOT USED)
Division 12 -- Furnishings (NOT USED)
Division 13 -- Special Construction (NOT USED)
Division 14 -- Conveying Equipment (NOT USED)
Division 20 -- Mechanical
20 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
Division 21 -- Fire Suppression (NOT USED)
Division 22 -- Plumbing
22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping
22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties
Job #09270
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 2
22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
Job #09270
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 3
Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)
23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
23 07 13 - Duct Insulation
23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation
23 09 01 - Temperature Control System
23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping
23 22 14 - Steam and Condensate Heating Specialties
23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units
23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
23 82 16 - Air Coils
Division 26 -- Electrical
26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 01 - Minor Electrical Demolition
26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less)
26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 34 - Conduit
26 05 37 - Boxes
26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices
26 24 16 - Panelboards
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 28 13 - Fuses
26 28 18 - Enclosed Switches
26 51 00 - Interior Lighting
26 52 01 - Emergency Lighting Equipment
Division 27 -- Communications
27 10 01 - Communication and Data-Processing Cabling
27 51 17 - Public Address Systems
Division 28 -- Electronic Safety and Security
28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm
Division 31 -- Earthwork (NOT USED)
Job #09270
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 4
Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements (NOT USED)
Division 33 -- Utilities (NOT USED)
DRAWINGS
THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS, BOUND SEPARATELY, AND THIS PROJECT MANUAL FORM THE
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS:
SHEET NO.
SHEET TITLE.
G001
TITLE SHEET
S101
FIREPROOFING PLAN AND DETAILS
A101
DEMOLITION PLAN
A102
FLOOR PLAN
A103
REFLECTED CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN
A104
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A105
FURNITURE PLAN
A201
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A601
SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
M001
MECHANICAL LEGENDS, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
M101
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN
M102
MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN AND ENLARGED PIPING PLAN
E001
ELECTRICAL LEGENDS, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
E101
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN
E102
LIGHTING PLAN
E103
ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job #09270
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - Page 5
SECTION 00 01 01
PROJECT MANUAL
GENESEE COUNTY
INVITATION FOR BIDS:
#12-015
PROJECT NO:
09-270
PROJECT:
FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS AT:
GENESEE COUNTY ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
1101 BEACH STREET
OWNER:
GENESEE COUNTY
1101 BEACH STREET
ARCHITECT:
THA ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS
817 E. KEARSLEY STREET
(810) 767-5600
FAX (810) 767-1650
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DATE: JUNE 3, 2012
Job #09270
PROJECT MANUAL
00 01 01 - Page 1
GENESEE COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM 200, COUNTY ADMINISTRATION BLDG.
1101 BEACH STREET
TELEPHONE (810) 257-3030
FAX (810) 257-3380
WWW.GC4ME.COM
ERIC F. HOPSON
Purchasing Director
June 5, 2012
NOTICE OF INVITATION FOR BIDS
IFB #12-015 GENESEE COUNTY FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS
Sealed bids will be received until 9:00 a.m. (EDT), Monday, June 18, 2012, at the Genesee
County Purchasing Department, 1101 Beach Street, Room 200, Flint, MI, 48502 for GENESEE
COUNTY FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS.
A mandatory pre-bid meeting and site inspection will be held on Wednesday, June 6, 2012,
at 3:00 p.m. (EDT), in the HR Training Room, Ground Floor, Genesee County Administration
Building, 1101 Beach Street, Flint, MI 48502.
A copy of the Invitation for Bids/Contract Documents may be downloaded on Tuesday, May
5, 2012 after 1:30 p.m. from the following site:
http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing, choose Business, Purchasing – Open Bids and
then click on the name of the IFB.
Full Scale Plan Sets may be obtained by cash or check, none of which will be refunded, at
Gwyer Reprographics, Inc., 8226 Embury Rd., Grand Blanc, MI, 48439, Ph.: (810) 695-9500 or
Email: [email protected].
Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond or cashier’s check in the amount of five (5)
percent of the amount bid, drawn payable to Genesee County, as security for the proper
execution of the Agreement.
The Invitation for Bids may be canceled by Genesee County at any time for any reason.
Genesee County reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality or
irregularity in any bid, and to negotiate with the successful bidder in the best interest of Genesee
County.
All inquiries shall be directed to Mr. George Ananich, THA Architects - Engineers, 817 E.
Kearsley St., Flint, MI 48503, Ph.: (810) 767-5600 or Email: [email protected]
GENESEE COUNTY INVITATION FOR BIDS #12-015
Eric F. Hopson
ERIC F. HOPSON, PURCHASING DIRECTOR
GENESEE COUNTY IS AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
SECTION 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INVITATION
1.01 BID SUBMISSION
A.
Submit bid proposal form, bid security, and other required documents enclosed in sealed, opaque
envelope, addressed to party receiving bids. Identify envelope with bid number, project name and project
number and Bidder's name and address. For mailing, place sealed envelope inside separate mailing
envelope marked: 'Sealed Bid Enclosed for Genesee County Invitation For Bids #12-015 - Genesee
County Friend of the Court Renovations'.
B.
Bid proposals transmitted via FACSIMILE AND EMAIL WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
C.
Bids shall be submitted on unaltered Proposal Form furnished within. The Bidder shall fill in all blanks by
typing or lettering in ink. Sums are to be given both numerically and written, with the amount written in
words to govern in case of discrepancy. Bid shall give legal name of Bidder and shall be signed by a
person legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.
D.
When the bid proposal requests individual Base Bids for different building projects, the Bidder shall insert
"No Bid" for any project not being bid.
E.
All addenda received by Bidder shall be acknowledged by placing all identifying addendum numbers and
dates on bid proposal form.
F.
Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Owner at Genesee
County Purchasing Department, 1101 Beach Street, Room 200, Flint, Michigan 48502 before 9:00 a.m.
local daylight time on the 18th day of June, 2012.
G.
Offers submitted after the above time will not be accepted.
H.
Offers will be opened publicly and read aloud immediately after the time for receipt of bids.
1.02 INTENT
A.
The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete a renovation project located
at Genesee County Friend of the Court for a Stipulated Sum contract, in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.03 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Work of this proposed Contract comprises renovation, demolition, and asbestos abatement, including
general construction, mechanical, and electrical Work.
1.04 CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS
A.
Furnish and install all labor and material according to latest codes, ordinances and regulations for all
governing bodies having project jurisdiction.
B.
The quality of labor and material shall be as required by drawings and specifications except when
exceeded by local codes, ordinances, or regulations.
1.05 TAXES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
Contractor shall include and be deemed to have included in his bid proposal all sales, consumers, use and
similar taxes currently imposed by legislative enactment. Genesee County is a Michigan Municipal
Corporation and, as such, it is exempt from Federal Excise Tax and Michigan Sales Tax.
B.
Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits, governmental fees, licenses, and
inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work.
1.06 CONTRACT TIME
A.
Perform the Work within the time stated in Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements.
Job #09270
00 21 13 - Page 1
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
2.01 DEFINITIONS
A.
Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Invitation For Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid
Form Bid securities identified.
B.
Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
C.
Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal.
D.
Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form.
2.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION
A.
The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 09-270, as prepared by Design Professional,
and with contents as identified in the Project Manual.
2.03 AVAILABILITY
A.
The Architectural Drawing portion of the Bid Documents for a Stipulated Sum contract may be obtained
from the office of Gwyer Reprographics ARC upon receipt of a fee, by cash or check, for the Document
sets.
1. Documents are available at www.gwyer.com in their "Public Planroom" or by Email orders to
[email protected].
2. Documents may also be ordered by telephone: (810) 695-9500.
B.
The Specification Manual portion of the Bid Documents may be downloaded from the following site:
1. http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing
2. Select 'Current Bids' and then click on the name of the IFB.
C.
Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does
not grant a license for other purposes.
2.04 EXAMINATION
A.
Bid Documents are on display at the offices of the following construction plan rooms:
McGraw-Hill/ReproMax, 2521 E. Michigan Avenue, Lansing, Michigan 48912
McGraw-Hill/ReproMax, 36060 Industrial Road, Livonia, Michigan 48150
Construction Association of Michigan, 43636 Woodward Avenue, Bloomfield Hills, Michigan 48302
CAM Tri-Cities, 334 South Water Street, Saginaw, MI 48607
Builders Exchange, 1240 E. Saginaw Street, Lansing, Michigan 48906
B.
Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Design Professional should the
documents be incomplete.
C.
Immediately notify Design Professional upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.
2.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA
A.
Direct questions to George Ananich, telephone (810) 767-5600.
1. Email Address: [email protected]
B.
All prospective bidders shall be responsible for routinely checking the Genesee County Purchasing
Department website: http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing to obtain issued addenda. Genesee
County shall not be responsible for the failure of a prospective bidder to obtain addenda and other
information issued at any time related to this IFB.
C.
Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents.
Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount.
D.
Verbal answers are not binding on any party.
Job #09270
00 21 13 - Page 2
E.
Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of
bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum posted on the Genesee County Purchasing Department
website: http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing.
F.
An addendum will be issued to Prime Bidders to clarify the subject or request a minimum two (2) days
before receipt of bids and will become part of the Contract Documents.
G.
Only interpretations, corrections or changes made by addendum will be binding.
2.06 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 10 days
before receipt of bids in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements and must be transmitted to
the Design Professional on the Substitution Request Form - Section 01 10 01.
B.
When a request to substitute a product is made, Design Professional may approve the substitution and will
issue an Addendum to known bidders.
C.
In submission of substitutions to products specified, bidders shall include in their bid all changes required in
the Work and changes to Contract Time and Contract Sum to accommodate such substitutions. A later
claim by the bidder for an addition to the Contract Time or Contract Sum because of changes in work
necessitated by use of substitutions shall not be considered.
D.
The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products. Submit,
with the request, all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to
that product specified.
E.
Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each proposed
substitution.
F.
Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted.
SITE ASSESSMENT
3.01 SITE EXAMINATION
A.
It is the Bidder's responsibility to study the drawings and specifications, visit the construction site and
examine existing conditions to correlate site observations with requirements of contract documents.
B.
No "EXTRA" payment or allowance will be made to cover obvious discrepancies or changes required due
to existing site conditions not visually determined and addressed in writing to the Design Professional
before bid opening, or by reason of any error or oversight on the Contractor's part.
C.
Examine the project site before submitting a bid.
3.02 MANDATORY PREBID MEETING AND SITE INSPECTION
A.
A Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting and Site Inspection has been scheduled for 3:00 p.m. on Wednesday, June
6, 2012 in the HR Training Room, ground floor, Genesee County Administration Building, 1101 Beach
Street, Flint, Michigan 48502.
B.
All general contract and subcontract bidders are invited.
C.
Representatives of Design Professional will be in attendance.
D.
Summarized minutes of this meeting will be circulated to all known bidders. These minutes will not form
part of the Contract Documents.
E.
Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum and posted on the Genesee
County Purchasing Department website: http://www.gc4me.com/departments/purchasing.
Job #09270
00 21 13 - Page 3
QUALIFICATIONS
4.01 EVIDENCE OF QUALIFICATIONS
A.
To demonstrate qualification for performing the Work of this Contract, bidders may be requested to submit
written evidence of financial position, license to perform work in the State.
BID SUBMISSION
5.01 BID INELIGIBILITY
A.
Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical
errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the Owner, be rejected.
B.
Bid Forms, Appendices, and enclosures that are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of Owner, be
declared unacceptable.
C.
Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements will, at the discretion of Owner,
invalidate the bid.
BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS
6.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT
A.
Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit as follows:
1. Bid Bond or a Cashier's Check of a sum no less than 5 percent of the Bid Amount.
B.
Endorse the Bid Bond in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the principal (Contractor)
and surety.
C.
Endorse the certified check in the name of Genesee County.
D.
The security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance and Payment
Bond(s) by the successful bidder.
E.
If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned.
6.02 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE
A.
Accepted Bidder: Provide a Performance and Payment bond as described in Section 00 80 00 Supplementary General Conditions.
6.03 INSURANCE
A.
Provided and executed Genesee County Insurance Checklist (see Appendix A) in accordance with the
insurance requirements of the Contract Documents.
6.04 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices.
6.05 ADDITIONAL BID INFORMATION
A.
Submit the following Supplements 24 hours after bid submission:
1. Document 00 43 36 - Subcontractors: Include the names of all Subcontractors and the portions of the
Work they will perform.
B.
Submit the following Supplements within ten (10) days after bid award:
1. Proposed Schedule of Values identifies the Bid Amount segmented into portions as requested.
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION
7.01 DURATION OF OFFER
A.
Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of ninety (90) days after the bid
closing date.
Job #09270
00 21 13 - Page 4
7.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER
A.
Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
B.
All Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers shall adhere to the Elliott-Larsen Civil Rights Act No. 453;
Public Acts of 1976 as amended shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment
with respect to hire, tenure, terms, conditions or privileges of employment or a matter directly or indirectly
related to employment because of race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex, height, weight or marital
status, and the Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers agree that all subcontracts and agreements shall
provide language substantially identical to that set forth herein. It is further understood that a breach of this
covenant may be regarded as a material breach of this Contract.
C.
Owner reserves the right to waive bid irregularities, to accept the bid in Owner's best interest and to accept
alternates in any order or combination to determine low Bidder on basis of the sum of base bid and
accepted alternates.
D.
Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids where incomplete or irregular, lacking bid bond, data
required by bidding documents, or where proposals exceed funds available.
E.
A complete list of all subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers shall be furnished to Design
Professional by the successful bidder within 24 hours after bid opening and before contracts are ready for
signing.
F.
Before award of contract, considered Bidder will be notified in writing if the Owner or Design Professional
has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by Bidder. Bidder may then withdraw bid, or
submit substitute person or entity together with adjustment in base bid for Owner's acceptance or
disqualification. In event of withdrawal by Bidder or disqualification by Owner, bid security will not be
forfeited.
1. Sub-contracts, material and equipment contract shall not be awarded until they have been accepted
by the Design Professional and the Owner.
G.
After acceptance by Owner, Design Professional on behalf of Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a
written letter of Contract Award.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Job #09270
00 21 13 - Page 5
SECTION 00 42 01
PROPOSAL FORM
PROJECT: GENESEE COUNTY FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS
GENESEE COUNTY INVITATION FOR BIDS: #12-015
PROJECT NO: 09-270
BIDDER INFORMATION
Name of Bidder:
Address:
City, State, ZIP:
Telephone:
Facsimile:
Date:
TO: Genesee County
I, the undersigned, have received the drawings and specifications for the Construction Work on the above
named project prepared by THA Architects / Engineers, Incorporated. I have also received the Addenda
acknowledged below and have included all their provisions and costs in my Bid. Having carefully
considered and examined all Contract Documents, having visited the site and examined all conditions
affecting the work, I submit the following Bid and hereby agree:
1. To furnish all labor, services, material, equipment and coordination of trades required to perform all
work in strict conformance with the Contract Documents, including all commissions, overhead, taxes,
fees and profit.
2. To complete the work by the time stipulated on the Proposal Form and under the conditions as
outlined in the Contract Documents.
3. To accept the provisions of the Instruction to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security.
4. To hold my Bid open for a maximum period of ninety (90) days.
BASE BID:
Proposal for the Work of asbestos abatement, selective demolition, masonry, carpentry, doors, frames and
hardware, interior finishes, mechanical and electrical work.
AMOUNT IN WORDS:
TOTAL AMOUNT:
$
TIME FOR COMPLETION
State the number of calendar days required to complete all of the Work and improvements, as specified in
the Contract Documents, from the date of execution of the Contract with the Owner or, date of the Letter of
Intent from the Owner:
Calendar Days
The Contractor shall not mobilize onsite until notified by the Owner.
No work shall be performed on Saturday and Sunday for the duration of the Project.
Job #09270
PROPOSAL FORM
00 42 01 - Page 1
ADDENDA
I, the undersigned, hereby acknowledge receipt of the following Addenda:
Addendum
No.:
Addendum
No.:
Addendum
No.:
Date:
Date:
Date:
SITE SUPERINTENDENT
The following on-site job superintendent will be assigned to this project and will not be replaced or
reassigned for the duration of the project, without approval of the Owner and Design Professional:
Name:
ACCEPTANCE
I, the undersigned, upon notification of the acceptance of the proposal, agree to execute a contract for the
above work, for the above stated compensation. Further I agree, if awarded the contract, to execute and
deliver to the Owner within 10 days after the signing of the contract, satisfactory bonds, in the form of 100%
"Performance Bond" and 100% "Labor and Material Payment Bond", according to the laws of the State of
Michigan governing this construction work, in an amount equal to the contract sum.
I have enclosed the required bid security, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid in the form of
a:
Secured Bid Bond:
Certified Check:
BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)
The Corporate Seal of
____________________________________________
(Bidder - print the full name of your firm)
was hereunto affixed in the presence of:
____________________________________________
(Authorized signing officer, Title)
(Seal)
____________________________________________
END OF PROPOSAL FORM
Job #09270
PROPOSAL FORM
00 42 01 - Page 2
SECTION 00 43 36
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
PARTICULARS
Herewith is the list of Subcontractors referenced in the bid submitted by:
(Bidder) ____________________________________
Dated ___________________ and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.
The following work will be performed (or provided) by Subcontractors and coordinated by us:
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
WORK SUBJECT
SUBCONTRACTOR NAME
Asbestos Abatement:
________________________________________________
Demolition:
________________________________________________
Masonry:
________________________________________________
Metal Fabrications:
________________________________________________
Carpentry:
________________________________________________
Casework:
________________________________________________
Doors and Frames:
________________________________________________
Door Hardware:
________________________________________________
Coiling Doors:
________________________________________________
Gypsum Board:
________________________________________________
Resilient Flooring:
________________________________________________
Carpet:
________________________________________________
Acoustical Ceilings:
________________________________________________
Painting:
________________________________________________
Plumbing:
________________________________________________
Mechanical:
________________________________________________
Electrical:
________________________________________________
Fire Alarm:
________________________________________________
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
00 43 36 - Page 1
SECTION 00 80 00
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Agreement Forms:
A.
The contract form of agreement between the Owner and Contractor shall be:
1. AIA Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, as amended ... (AIA Document
A101 - 2007 Edition).
1.02 Related Documents:
A.
Standard AIA Forms: The General Conditions of the Contract for the Construction of buildings "Standard
Form of the American Institute of Architects" 2007 Edition, AIA Document A201, Articles 1 through 14
inclusive, are hereby made an integral part of this specification.
B.
Where any Article of the "AIA General Conditions" is supplemented hereby, the AIA Provisions of such
Article shall remain in effect. All supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto.
C.
Where any such Article is amended, voided, or superseded the provisions of such Article not so specifically
amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect.
D.
The AIA Document A201 may be reviewed at the office of the Design Professional and/or may be obtained
from the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, Northwest, Washington, D.C. 20006; or
from the AIA-Michigan, 553 E. Jefferson Ave., Detroit, MI 48226.
E.
The following Genesee County Documents shall supplement the Contract:
1. Appendix A - Genesee County Insurance Checklist.
2. Appendix B - Genesee County Standard Terms and Conditions.
3. Appendix C - Genesee County Major Contract Addendum.
F.
The following Articles of the General Conditions are modified herein:
1. Article 1 - General Provisions
2. Article 3 - Contractor
3. Article 7 - Changes in the Work
4. Article 8 - Time
5. Article 9 - Payments and Completion
6. Article 10 - Protection of Persons and Property
7. Article 11 - Insurance and Bonds
8. Article 16 - Equal Opportunity
9. Article 17 - Prevailing Wages
PART 2 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS:
2.01 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS:
A.
B.
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS; add the following subparagraphs:
1.1.9 OR EQUAL: The words "or equal" or "approved equivalent" shall mean any material, system or
article which, as finally determined by the Design Professional is equal in quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design to the material, system, or article specified and will perform adequately the functions
imposed by the general design.
1. The Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at his own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of
the Design Professional, that the proposed product is equal to the specified product.
2. Requests for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Design Professional only from
the Contractor on the "Substitution Request Form" included at end of General Requirements, Division
1.
3. Requests for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Design Professional after
bidding only in the following cases:
a. The specified products cannot be obtained because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies, or
discontinued product.
Job #09270
00 80 00 - Page 1
b.
4.
The proposed equivalent is superior, or is equal to the specified product and its use is an
advantage to the Owner in the opinion of the Design Professional.
c. The proposed equivalent is guaranteed, in writing, by the Contractor for minimum of one year
after final acceptance of the building or for a longer period of time equal to that required in the
Contract Documents for originally specified product.
Where the Design Professional, pursuant to the provisions of this section, approved a contractor
proposed equivalent product and upon installation such product requires a different quantity and/or
arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit, or any other part of the work from that originally
specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide all additional
materials and services required at his own expenditure with no additional cost added to original
contract sum.
C.
1.1.10 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: The words "Design Professional" shall refer to the firm of THA
Architects Engineers, including their employees and consultants. Included shall be the Architects, the
designers, planners, engineers, and field representatives who are responsible for a particular portion of the
design work.
D.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; add the following subparagraph
1. 1.2.4: The Drawings are intended to show design, general arrangement and extent of the work and
are partly diagrammatic. They are not intended to be scaled or used for rough-in measurements, nor
to be used as Shop Drawings. Inadvertent discrepancies or the omission of notes or details on any
drawing but given on another drawing shall not be cause for additional charge or claim.
2.02 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR:
A.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS; add the following subparagraphs:
1. 3.4.4 Prior to the execution of the contract, the contractor shall provide a list showing the name of the
manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products identified in the General Requirements of
the Specifications (Division 1) in particular Schedule of Values and where applicable, the name of the
installing subcontractor.
2. 3.4.5 The Design Professional will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the
Owner or the Design Professional, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such
proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not available, the Design
Professional may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. Failure
of the Owner or the Design Professional to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable
objection. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements
of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to
such requirements.
3. 3.4.6 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Design Professional will consider a
formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set
forth in the General Requirements of the Specifications (Divisions 1). By making requests for
substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4.1 above, the Contractor:
a. .1 Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product
and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified.
b. .2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the
contractor would for that specified.
c. .3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
Contract but excludes costs under separate Contracts, and excludes the Design Professional's
redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution subsequently
become apparent.
d. .4 Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for the work to be complete in all respects.
4. 3.4.7 It is hereby understood and agreed that no products or materials containing asbestos including
chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, or any
combination of these materials that have been chemically treated and/or altered, shall be installed or
introduced into the building by the Contractor, his employees, agents, subcontractors, or other
individuals or entities over whom the Contractor has control.
Job #09270
00 80 00 - Page 2
a.
5.
B.
.1 The Contractor will be required to sign and submit the "Contractor Certification of AsbestoFree Product Installation Form," included at the end of General Requirements, Division 1, that all
products and materials installed or introduced into the building will be asbestos-free.
b. .2 The Contractor will also be required to furnish statements from the manufacturer verifying their
products to be asbestos-free.
3.4.8 The Contractor shall comply with Section 4, Act 251, Public Acts of 1955, State of Michigan, and
agree that he and his Subcontractors will not discriminate against an employee or applicant for
employment to be employed in the performance of the Work, with respect to his hire, tenure, terms,
conditions or privileges of employment, because of his race, sex, religion, age, national origin, color,
marital status, handicap or political beliefs.
3.5 WARRANTY; add the following subparagraph:
1. 3.5.2 Each Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional, a written guarantee which shall be in
accordance with Article 3, subparagraph 3.5.1 and Article 13, subparagraph 13.7.1.3 of the General
Conditions, and all such additional guarantees, in writing, as are required by the specifications. All
guarantees for material and workmanship shall be for a minimum one (1) year period, starting at the
date of substantial completion, or for a longer period of time as specified in individual sections of
specifications.
2.03 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK:
A.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES; make the following clarification to subparagraph 7.3.6:
1. In the first sentence of subparagraph 7.3.6, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead
and profit" and substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set
forth in subparagraph 7.3.6.6 below."
B.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES; add the following subparagraph:
1. 7.3.7.6 In subparagraph 7.3.7, the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total
cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule:
a. For the Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor's own forces, use 15% (percent) of
the cost.
b. For the Contractor, for any work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractors, use 10%
(percent) of the amount due the Subcontractor.
c. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so
minor their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization
of costs including labor, materials, and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the
format described in Section 01 10 05 - THA Bulletin Pricing Format. Where major cost items are
Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change be approved without such
itemization.
2.04 ARTICLE 8 - TIME:
A.
8.1 DEFINITIONS; add the following subparagraphs:
1. 8.1.5 As between the Owner and the Contractor: as to all acts or failures to act occurring prior to the
relevant Date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run
and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than
such data of substantial completion; as to all acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the
relevant Date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run
and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than
the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment.
2. 8.1.6 It shall be understood and agreed that the time stated in the Proposal Form for the completion of
the work under the Contract is reasonable, taking into consideration the average climatic conditions of
the project site, conditions of the construction industry, and the labor availability in the locality.
2.05 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION:
A.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT; add the following subparagraphs:
Job #09270
00 80 00 - Page 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
9.3.4 The Contractor will be paid monthly progress payments up to ninety percent (90%) of the value
of the Work completed less retainage of ten percent (10%) upon issuance of monthly certificates of
payment by the Design Professional.
9.3.5 Applications shall be in the office of the Design Professional by the first of the month to insure
proper processing and payment by the twenty fifth of the same month. Submit original and two copies
of application, AIA forms G702.
9.3.6 Applications for payment received by the Design Professional after date fixed above will be paid
by Owner 45 days after Design Professional receives the application.
9.3.7 Application may be made for amount of material and equipment delivered and stored at site or
in approved off site storage, less ten percent (10%) retainage. Submit proof of insurance coverage for
items stored off site.
9.3.8 Amounts of changes in work, not in dispute, pending final determination of cost may be applied
for, less ten percent (10%) retainage, as provided for in subparagraph 9.3.1.1 of the General
Conditions.
9.3.9 Final payment to the Contractor will be made thirty (30) days after the Work is finally complete,
all items on the Design Professional's "Punch List" have been resolved satisfactorily and the Work is
accepted by the Design Professional and the Owner.
9.3.10 The Contractor shall also furnish with his application his Sworn Statement that all bills up to the
amount requested have been paid. Every application shall be complete with Waivers of Lien (If
required) from suppliers and subcontractors.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION; In subparagraph 9.8.5, delete the second (2nd) sentence beginning
with, "Upon such acceptance and consent of surety..........", in it's entirety and add the following
subparagraph:
1. 9.8.6 Upon issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the ten percent (10%) retainage
shall not be reduced nor released until all items contained in the Design Professional's "Punch List"
have been satisfactorily resolved.
2.06 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY:
A.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY; add the following to subparagraphs 10.2.2:
1. The Contractor shall comply with the General Safety Rules and Regulations for the Construction
Industry as covered in the Construction Safety Act 89 of Public Acts of 1963, State of Michigan and all
other applicable current State and Federal Safety Regulations now in force, or enforce at the time of
performance of the work.
2.07 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BOND:
A.
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE; add the following to the end of paragraph: In the event
that liability insurance coverage is written on an occurrence basis, such coverage shall be continued at the
Contractor's expense, with the additional insured endorsement also continuing, for a period of three (3)
years after the date of final payment.
B.
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE; add the following subparagraph:
1. 11.1.5 The Contractor shall maintain the Coverages and Limits noted on the Genesee County
Insurance Checklist located in Appendix A.
2. The State of Michigan has a no-fault automobile insurance requirement. The Contractor shall be
certain coverage is provided which conforms to any specific stipulation in the Law.
3. The Owner and Design Professional shall be named as an additional insured on all of the above
policies, except Workers' Compensation.
4. All certificates must have the cancellation clause amended to read as follows:
a. "Should any of the above policies be canceled before the expiration date there of, the issuing
company will mail 30 days written notice to the certificate holders."
5. All insurance shall be carried with companies authorized to do business in the State of Michigan.
C.
11.2 BUILDER'S RISK LIABILITY INSURANCE; add the following subparagraphs:
1. 11.2.2 The Owner shall provide Builder's Risk Insurance for the Work.
D.
11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE; add the following subparagraphs:
Job #09270
00 80 00 - Page 4
1.
2.
11.3.1.7 Certificates of Insurance shall be provided to the Owner and Design Professional.
11.3.1.8 The Contractor and his subcontractors shall, at their option, separately insure all their
respective equipment such as tools, equipment scaffolding towers, staging and other temporary
buildings owned, borrowed, or rented, and all materials which do not become a part of the
construction.
2.08 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND; add the following subparagraph:
A.
11.4.3 The Contractor will be required to furnish at his expense, prior to the execution of the Contract,
bonds in the amount of 100% of the Total Contract Price for the faithful performance of the Contract and for
the payment of all labor and material obligations arising thereunder in accordance with Article 7.5 of the
General Conditions. Bonds containing a Statute of Limitations or time limitation will NOT be acceptable.
All bonds shall be underwritten by companies authorized to do business in the State of Michigan.
2.09 ARTICLE 16 - EQUAL OPPORTUNITY:
A.
The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as noted in the following subparagraphs and in the
Elliott-Larsen Civil Rights Act No. 453; Public Acts of 1976 as amended:
1. 16.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant
for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin or age. The Contractor shall take
affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, marital status,
handicap or political beliefs.
2. 16.2 Such action shall include, but not be limited, to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion
or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of
compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in
conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the
policies of non-discrimination.
3. 16.3 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees
placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for
employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, marital status, handicap or
political beliefs.
2.10 ARTICLE 17 - PREVAILING WAGE RATES
A.
17.3 The Prime Contractor shall be financially responsible for the payment of prevailing wages by all subcontractors contracted for work on the project. The Owner, by written notice to the Prime Contractor and
the sureties of the contractor known to the Owner, may terminate the contractor's right to proceed with that
part of the contract, for which less than the prevailing rates of wages and fringe benefits have been or will
be paid, and may proceed to complete the contract by separate agreement with another contractor and the
original contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the Owner for any excess costs.
PART 3 - FORMS AND SCHEDULES:
3.01 Schedule:
A.
Section 01 41 01 - Prevailing Wage Rates
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
00 80 00 - Page 5
SECTION 00 80 01
APPENDIX A - GENESEE COUNTY INSURANCE CHECKLIST
Bid Title
Bid Number:
GENESEE COUNTY FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS
IFB# 12-015
Coverages Required
X 1. Workers' Compensation
X 2. Employers' Liability
X
3. General Liability
X
4. Products/Completed operations
aggregate
X
5. Automobile liability
Owned, hired, nonowned
6. Umbrella liability/Excess Coverage
7 Owners and Contractors Protective
X
X
X
X
X
X
Limits (Figures denote minimums)
Statutory limits of Michigan
$100,000 accident/disease
$500,000 policy limit, disease
Including Premises/operations
$1,000,000 per occurrence with $2,000,000 aggregate
$1,000,000 per occurrence with $2,000,000
(If applicable)
$1,000,000 combined single limit each accident-
$ 3,000,000 BI & PD and PI
$ 1,000,000 per occurrence with $2,000,000 in the
Aggregate
8. Other insurance required: Pollution Liability. Bonds as required by contract and included in the IFB.
9. Best's rating: A VIII or better, or its equivalent (Retention Group Financial Statements)
10. The certificate must state Proposer number and title
11. Genesee County named as an additional insured on other than workers' compensation via endorsement
A copy of the endorsement must be included with the certificate. Evidence of Addition Insured under
Blanket coverage within the policy language is also acceptable. However, a copy of the language
applicable to this must be provided.
FAX THIS PAGE TO YOUR INSURANCE AGENT/BROKER
Insurance Agent's Statement
I have reviewed the requirements with Prospective Contractor named below. In addition:
_____ The above policies carry the following deductibles:
_____________________________________________________________________________
Liability policies are occurrence _____
claims made _____
___________________________________
Insurance Agent
______________________________________
Signature
PLEASE NOTE #11 ABOVE. ADDING ADDITIONAL INSURED [AI] TO THE DESCRIPTION IS NOT
ACCEPTABLE. AN ENDORSEMENT OR COPY OF AI LANGUAGE IS REQUIRED
Prospective Contractor's Statement
I understand the insurance requirements and will comply in full if awarded the contract.
___________________________________
Bidder
______________________________________
Signature
Required general insurance provisions are provided in the checklist above. These are based on the contract and exposures of the work to be
completed under the Contract. Modifications to this checklist may occur at any time prior to signing of the contract. Any changes will require
approval by the Prospective Contractor, the department and County Risk Manager. To the degree possible, all changes will be made as soon as
feasible. REVISED 04/08/2010
Job #09270
APPENDIX A - GENESEE COUNTY INSURANCE CHECKLIST
00 80 01 - Page 1
SECTION 00 80 02
APPENDIX B - GENESEE COUNTY STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS
1.
Genesee County Purchasing Regulations: All procurements are conducted in
accordance with the Genesee County Purchasing Regulations, a copy of which is on file
and available for inspection at the Genesee County Purchasing Department, 1101 Beach
Street, Room 200, Flint, Michigan, 48502.
2.
Evaluation and Award: The contract will be awarded to the lowest responsive and
responsible bidder whose bid is determined to be most advantageous to the County.
Genesee County reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality or
irregularity in any bid, and to negotiate with the apparent successful bidder in the best
interest of Genesee County.
3.
Local Preference Policy: Within 5 business days of bid opening, if the lowest responsive
and responsible bidder is not a Genesee County Business, a Genesee County Business
who has submitted a responsive bid that is no more than 5% higher than the lowest
responsive bid may submit an amended bid to the Purchasing Director. A Genesee
County Business who is the lowest responsive and responsible bidder may not amend
their bid pursuant to this section. Amended bids submitted by Genesee County
Businesses in this manner shall be considered along with other responsive bids submitted
by responsible bidders.
4.
Cancellation; Rejection of Bids: The Invitation for Bids may be canceled by Genesee
County at any time for any reason. Any bid received may be rejected in whole or in part
when in the best interests of Genesee County.
5.
Receipt of Bids: It is solely the responsibility of the bidder to assure the timely receipt of
its bid at the location indicated in IFB #11-032. LATE BIDS AND BIDS SENT BY
FACSIMILE OR EMAIL WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
6.
Tax: Genesee County is a Michigan Municipal Corporation and as such it is exempt from
Federal Excise Tax and Michigan Sales Tax.
7.
Non-Discrimination: The successful bidder/Contractor covenants that it will not
discriminate against an employee or applicant of employment with respect to hire, tenure,
terms, conditions, or privileges of employment, or a matter directly or indirectly related to
employment, because of race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex, height, weight,
marital status or a disability that is unrelated to the individual’s ability to perform the duties
of a particular job or position, and that it will require the same non-discrimination
assurances from any subcontractor who may be used to carry out duties described in this
contract. Breach of this covenant shall be regarded as a material breach of this contract.
8.
Conflict of Interest: Each bidder, by submitting a bid, represents that the bidder has no
knowledge that any employee, representative or agent of the bidder is a County employee
who has directly or indirectly participated on behalf of the County in the contemplated
procurement, or that any County employee who has so participated or any member of
Job #09270
00 80 02 - Page 1
such an employee’s immediate family has a financial interest pertaining to the
contemplated procurement from the bidder, and represents that the bidder reasonably
believes that no employee, representative or agent of bidder is a County employee who
has so participated and that no County employee who has so participated or member of
that employee’s immediate family has a financial interest in the contemplated procurement
from the bidder.
9.
Inspection: All goods are received subject to inspection and testing. If goods are
defective or fail to meet the bid specifications, Genesee County shall have the right to
reject the goods or to correct the defects. The contractor shall pay Genesee County for
expenses incurred in correcting defects. Rejected goods will be held for forty-five days
after delivery awaiting instructions from the contractor. After the forty-five day period,
Genesee County will dispose of the goods without further liability to Genesee County. The
contractor is responsible for the costs of handling, packing, and transportation incurred in
returning or disposing of defective or non-conforming goods.
10.
Bidder’s Representations: Each bidder, by submitting a bid, represents as follows:
1)
That the bidder has read and understood the IFB documents and has submitted its
bid in accordance therewith;
2)
That the bid has been submitted by a duly authorized owner, partner, or corporate
officer;
3)
That the bid submitted has been prepared independently without collusion,
agreement, understanding, or planned common course of action with any other
supplier of the goods or services described in the IFB, designed to limit independent
offers or competition.
11.
Independent Contractor: Bidder agrees that if awarded a contract, it shall be an
independent contractor and not an employee of Genesee County. The contractor shall
secure, at its own expense, all personnel required in supplying goods or services under the
awarded contract. All such personnel shall have no contractual relationship with Genesee
County and shall not be considered employees of Genesee County.
12.
Insurance: Each bidder must submit a completed Bidder’s Insurance Checklist, if so
stipulated in the IFB. The required coverage and minimum limits may vary dependent
upon the dollar amount of the contract, length of time of the contract, and the hazard level
of the work or services to be performed. The types of insurance coverage may include:
workers compensation, general liability, auto liability and/or professional liability. The
insurer, insurance retention group, pool, or self-insurer must be authorized/licensed to
provide such coverage within the State of Michigan and meet minimum financial ratings, if
applicable, as supplied by Best or S & P.
13.
Genesee County Major Contract Addendum: Each bid over $40,000 submitted to
Genesee County for construction must include an executed Major Contract Addendum
Job #09270
00 80 02 - Page 2
Affidavit(s). Bidders are required to demonstrate their efforts to involve Minority, Female,
and Handicapper owned subcontractors.
In addition, Contractors performing construction for Genesee County must agree to the
Local Workforce Requirement by hiring at least 50% Genesee County residents for any
County project. Further information on these requirements may be obtained from:
Genesee County Office of Equity and Diversity, 1101 Beach Street, Room 328, Flint,
Michigan 48502, Ph.: (810) 257-3028 and Fax: (810)-768-7943
14.
Prevailing Wage Requirements: All contractors and subcontractors shall pay its laborers
and mechanics not less than the prevailing wage rates and fringe benefits for
corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on similar projects in the area.
For the purposes of this solicitation, a Contractor shall be in compliance if the Contractor is
in compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act, 40 U.S. C. §3141, et seq., and pays wages
consistent with the prevailing wage rates published by the United States Department of
Labor. Genesee County shall, at a minimum, take the following actions with regards to
enforcement of the Prevailing Wage requirements:
A.
The County shall require the Contractor to submit a certified payroll record
consistent with requirements established by the Davis Bacon Act.
B.
The County shall review the certified payroll record for compliance with this Section;
and
C.
The contract language shall reserve the right of the County to conduct on-site
interviews with the Contractor’s employees to ensure compliance with the prevailing
wage requirements.
15.
Indemnification: The successful bidder shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless
Genesee County and its officers and employees from and against all claims, losses,
damages, and expenses including, but not limited to, attorney’s fees arising out of or
resulting from the performance of the contract.
16.
Disclosure: All information in a submitted bid is subject to disclosure under the provisions
of Public Act N. 442 of 1976 known as the “Freedom of Information Act”. This Act also
provides for the complete disclosure of contracts and attachments thereto.
17.
Clarification of Bids: Discussions may be conducted with responsible bidders who
submit bids determined to be reasonably susceptible of being selected for award for the
purpose of clarification to assure full understanding of, and conformance to, the solicitation
requirements.
18.
Bid Considerations: All costs incurred in the preparation of a response to this IFB or any
costs prior to approval of the contract by Genesee County and formal notification to the
selected bidder will be the responsibility of the respondent, and will not be reimbursed by
Genesee County. Bids should be prepared simply and economically, providing a
Job #09270
00 80 02 - Page 3
straightforward, concise description of the bidder’s ability to meet the requirements of this
IFB.
19.
Warranty: The bidder warrants that all goods and services furnished under a contract
resulting from the IFB shall be in conformance with the IFB documents, and that the goods
are of merchantable quality as described in the Uniform Commercial Code, Section 2-314,
and fit for the purpose for which they are sold. This warranty is in addition to any
manufacturer’s standard warranty which may apply or any warranty provided by law, and is
in addition to all other express warranties made by the bidder.
20.
Applicable Law: Any contract resulting from the IFB shall be governed by the laws of the
State of Michigan. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the contractor
shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, duties, licenses, inspections, and approvals
necessary for the execution and completion of the contract. The contractor shall give all
notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any
public authority bearing on the performance of the contract.
21.
Prime Contractor Responsibilities: The successful bidder(s) shall be required to
assume responsibility for all services offered in the bid regardless of who produces them.
Further, the County will consider the successful bidder to be the sole point of contact with
regard to contractual matters, including payment of any and all charges resulting from the
contract.
22.
Right to Inspect: Genesee County may, at reasonable times, inspect the plant, place of
business, or work site of a contractor or subcontractor which is pertinent to the
performance of a contract or potential contract.
23.
Right to Audit: Genesee County may at reasonable times and places, audit the books
and records of any contractor who has submitted cost or pricing data as a part of its bid, to
the extent that such books and records are pertinent to such cost or pricing data for a
period of three years from the date of final payment under the contract. Genesee County
shall be entitled to audit the books and records of a contractor or subcontractor other than
a firm fixed-price contract to the extent that such books and records are pertinent to the
performance of such contract or subcontract. Such books and records shall be maintained
by the contractor for a period of three years from the date of final payment under a prime
contract and by the subcontractor for a period of three years from the date of final payment
under a subcontract.
Job #09270
00 80 02 - Page 4
SECTION 00 80 03
APPENDIX C - GENESEE COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM
Job #09270
APPENDIX C - GENESEE COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM
00 80 03 - Page 1
1
GENESEE COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM
LOCAL WORK FORCE, MINORITY, WOMAN, AND
PERSONS WITH A DISABILITY PARTICIPATION
The purpose of this contract addendum is to promote the utilization of a local work
force, minority-, woman-, and persons with a disability-owned business, as well as
minority, female, and disabled employees in County contracts for construction
valued at $40,000 or more. In accordance with this contract addendum, all County
departments soliciting bids for projects estimated to cost $40,000 or more shall, at
the time of solicitation, forward all bid specifications to the Genesee County Office
of Equity & Diversity (GCOED), Contract Compliance Unit.
GENESEE COUNTY NON-DISCRIMINATION POLICY
Genesee County is committed to a policy of Equal Employment Opportunity
(EEO). The County requires that contractors, subcontractors, vendors, and
suppliers of goods and services doing business with the County prohibit all
unlawful discrimination based on race, color, national origin, age, sex, marital
status, religion, height, weight, pregnancy or disability.
CONTRACT ADDENDUM DEFINITIONS
CONTRACT(S)
All types of County agreements, regardless of what they may be called, for the
procurement of supplies, services, or construction.
CONSTRUCTION
The process of building, altering, repairing, improving, or demolishing any public
structure or building, or other public improvements of any kind to any public real
property.
DISABILITY
A determinable physical or mental disability of an individual, or the history of a
disability, which may result from disease, injury, congenital condition of birth, or
functional disorder.
DISABLED PERSON
An individual who has a disability.
Page 1 of 11
EEO STATEMENT
A statement prohibiting discrimination in employment, education, housing, public
accommodations, or public services based on race, color, national origin, age, sex,
marital status, religion, height, weight, pregnancy, or disability.
EEO PLAN
A plan designed to correct or address systemic exclusions of racial and ethnic
minorities, women, and persons with a disability from an employer’s work force.
WOMAN-OWNED BUSINESS
A business enterprise in which one or more women own more than 50% of the
voting shares or interest in the business; control and operate more than 50% of
the business; and for which more than 50% of the net profit or loss accrues to
woman/women.
The woman ownership interest in the firm must be real, substantial, and
continuing. Such interest is characterized by the following factors:
1.
Risk of loss/share of profit commensurate with the proportional
ownership; and
2.
Receipt of the customary incidents of ownership, such as salary
and/or intangible benefits.
The business must perform a useful business function according to the custom
and practice in the industry. For example, acting merely as a conduit of funds to a
non-woman owned firm, when that is unnecessary to accomplish the business
transaction, does not constitute a useful business function according to custom
and practice in the industry.
GOOD FAITH EFFORT
Any method which establishes that the bidder has affirmatively endeavored to give
minority-, woman-, and persons-with-a-disability-owned businesses a full and
equal opportunity to participate in a County contract as a subcontractor or
employee. A bidder may demonstrate its good faith effort by providing evidence of
the following:
1.
Encouraging minority-, woman-, and persons-with-a-disability-owned
businesses to attend pre-bid meetings scheduled by the contractor
or County;
Page 2 of 11
2.
Advertising in general circulation media and trade publications, as
well as minority, woman, and persons with a disability focused
media;
3.
Providing minority-, women-, and person-with-a-disability owned
businesses with adequate information about the project, i.e.,
specifications and requirements;
4.
Negotiating with minority-, women-, and person-with-a-disability
owned businesses in good faith and;
5.
Using the services of available local, state, and federal minority-,
woman-, and persons-with-a-disability- business assistance offices
for recruitment of these respective businesses.
LOCAL WORK FORCE
Employees who are bona fide residents of Genesee County.
PERSON(S)-WITH-A-DISABILITY-OWNED BUSINESS
A business enterprise in which a disabled person or persons own more than 50%
of the voting shares or interest in the business; control and operate more than
50% of the business; and for which more than 50% of the net profit or loss accrues
to person(s) who are disabled.
The ownership interest of the disabled person in the firm must be real, substantial,
and continuing. Such interest is characterized by the following factors:
1.
ownership; and
2.
non-disabled person-owned firm when that is unnecessary to accomplish the
business transaction does not constitute a useful business function according to
custom and practice in the industry.
MINORITY
A citizen of the United States who is Black, Hispanic, Asian or Pacific Islander,
American Indian or Alaskan Native, as such are respectively defined below:
Page 3 of 11
a.
Black (not of Hispanic Origin):
A U.S. citizen having origins in any
of the Black racial groups of Africa, and regarded as such by the
community of which the person claims to be a part.
b.
Hispanic:
All persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central
or South American, or other Spanish culture or origin, regardless of
race.
c.
Asian or Pacific Islander: All persons having origins in any of the
original people of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian
Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands.
This area includes, for
example, China, India, Japan, Korea, the Philippine Islands, and
Samoa.
d.
American Indian or Alaskan Native:
All persons having origins in
any of the original peoples of North America, and who maintain
cultural identification through tribal affiliation or community
recognition
MINORITY-OWNED BUSINESS
A business enterprise in which a minority or minorities own more than 50% of the
voting shares or interest in the business and control and operate more than 50%
of the business, and with respect to which more than 50% of the net profit or loss
accrues to person who are members of a minority.
The minority ownership interest in the firm must be real, substantial, and
continuing. Such interest is characterized by the following factors:
1.
ownership; and
2.
non-minority owned firm when that is unnecessary to accomplish the business
transaction does not constitute a useful business function according to custom and
practice in the industry.
Page 4 of 11
MINORITY-, WOMAN-, AND PERSONS-WITH-A-DISABILITY-OWNED
BUSINESS PARTICIPATION
Genesee County is committed to equal opportunity for minority-, woman-, and
persons-with-a-disability-owned businesses in County contracts. All bidders,
including contractors, vendors, suppliers, etc., who will utilize subcontractors are
required to state in their bids how minority-, woman-, or persons-with-a-disabilityowned subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers are to be included in the contract
project. Bidders must provide the estimated dollar amount of payments to these
categories separately. The procedures to actively include minority-, woman-, and
persons-with-a-disability-owned businesses in the contract project will be
considered, as one of numerous factors, in the bid evaluation. The primary
contractor or vendor is required to establish its good faith effort at compliance with
all requirements of this contract addendum section. The GCOED maintains a list
of certified minority-, woman-, and persons-with-a-disability-owned businesses that
is available to the public.
MINORITY-, WOMAN-, PERSONS-WITH-A-DISABILITY
EMPLOYEE PARTICIPATION
Genesee County strongly encourages the utilization of minority, woman, and
persons-with-a- disability employees in County contracts. All bidders are required
to submit an Equal Employment Opportunity (“EEO”) Statement and an EEO Plan
detailing the participation of minorities, women, and persons with a disability in the
bidder’s work force. Note: In accordance with the directives of Proposition 06-02,
the inclusion of minority and women employees in the bid is not a consideration in
the bid evaluation.
LOCAL WORK FORCE PARTICIPATION
Subject to the remaining provisions of this paragraph, at least 50% of all
employees specifically hired for this contract project should be bona fide residents
of Genesee County, Michigan. Compliance with this requirement may be waived
or modified by the Genesee County Board of Commissioners for good cause. The
County may make reasonable inspection of the records of the contractor or vendor
in order to monitor compliance with this requirement. Any other provisions of this
contract addendum notwithstanding:
1.
The Contractor’s Affidavit that at least 50% of the total contract work
force through contract completion (or such lesser percentage as may
be required in view of any waiver) has consisted of bona fide
residents of Genesee County shall be a part of the contractor’s or
vendor’s final application to the County for payment, and submission
of such affidavit shall be a condition of final payment becoming due.
Page 5 of 11
MONITORING
The Genesee County Office of Equity & Diversity will monitor the compliance with
the provisions of this contract addendum.
The contractor or vendor agrees to cooperate with the County’s staff in monitoring
compliance with this contract addendum and in submitting relevant business
records. The contractor or vendor shall be responsible for providing any
requested supporting documentation as to its subcontractors and work force.
Any knowingly false statement made in connection with this contract addendum
shall constitute a material breach of the contract.
Date:
May 21, 2007
Genesee County Board of Commissioners
Resolution 89-469, amended by
Resolution 89-599 on November 7, 1989.
Amended by Resolution 91-252 on April 30, 1991.
Amended by Resolution 07-177 on May 21 , 2007
Page 6 of 11
Attachment A
GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE
STATE OF MICHIGAN)
COUNTY OF GENESEE)
_______________________________________submits this Affidavit in support
(General Contractor’s Company Name)
of its bid regarding the following project:
________________________________________________________________
(Project Name)
We have reviewed the Genesee County Major Contract Addendum.
achieves compliance with that addendum.
This bid
GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATUS
We are ________Minority-Owned Business
________Woman-Owned Business
________Person-with-a-Disability-Owned Business
________None of the above
SUBCONTRACTOR SECTION
The subcontractors to which we will award contracts on this project and their
estimated dollar amount of this project will be:
Company Name
Indicate whether Minority/Woman/
Disability-Owned Business
Page 7 of 11
Dollar Amount
SIGNATURE SECTION
________________________________________________________________
(General Contractor’s Signature)
(Title)
________________________________________________________________
(Company Name)
(Street / P. O. Box)
________________________________________________________________
(Company Telephone Number)
(City)
(State) (Zip)
NOTARIZATION SECTION
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ Day of _______________, 20__
_________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:_____________
NOTE: Attach supplemental sheets if needed. Such sheets are part of this
Affidavit.
Page 8 of 11
Attachment B
MINORITY-, WOMAN-, PERSON-WITH-A-DISABILITYSUBCONTRACTOR/VENDOR/SUPPLIER AFFIDAVIT RELATING TO
THE GENESEE COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM
STATE OF MICHIGAN)
COUNTY OF GENESEE)
We have reviewed the Genesee County Major Contract Addendum.
We are a ________Minority-Owned Business
________Woman-Owned Business
________Person-with-a-Disability-Owned Business
within the meaning of the addendum. We are certified through the following
agency: __________________________________________________________
We have agreed to do: ______________________________________________
(Designate Type of Work)
on the ___________________________________________________ project as
a subcontractor/vendor/supplier for:
________________________________________________________ for a price
(General Contractor’s Name)
of _________________ (Dollar Amount).
This agreement is our company’s actual agreement.
SIGNATURE SECTION
_________________________________________________________________
(Owner’s Signature)
(Title)
_________________________________________________________________
(Company Name)
_________________________________________________________________
(City)
(State) (Zip)
_________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires: _____________
Page 9 of 11
Attachment C
LOCAL WORK FORCE PARTICIPATION RELATING TO THE
STATE OF MICHIGAN)
COUNTY OF GENESEE)
We have reviewed the Genesee County Major Contract Addendum. We confirm
that at least 50% of the total contract work force performing the work required on
the
_____________________________________________________
project
through final completion consisted of bona fide residents of Genesee County.
We understand that the submission of this Affidavit is a condition of final payment
becoming due.
SIGNATURE SECTION
_________________________________________________________________
(Owner’s Signature)
(Title)
_________________________________________________________________
(Company Name)
_________________________________________________________________
(City)
(State) (Zip)
_________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires: _____________
Page 10 of 11
Attachment D
WAIVER OF MINORITY, WOMEN, AND PERSONS WITH A
DISABILITY-OWNED BUSINESS PARTICIPATION OR LOCAL
WORK FORCE PARTICIPATION RELATING TO THE GENESEE
COUNTY MAJOR CONTRACT ADDENDUM
In compliance with the Genesee County Major Contract Addendum, the minority-,
woman-, and person-with-a-disability-owned business or local work force
participation may be waived by the Genesee County Board of Commissioners with
respect to a County contract due to special circumstances, the unique character of
the work to be performed, or the demonstrated unavailability of qualified Minority-,
Woman-, or Persons-with-a-Disability-Owned Businesses, or local residents.
Reason for Waiver: _________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Name of Company Seeking Waiver
_________________________________________________________________
Street/P. O. Box
_________________________________________________________________
City
State Zip
Telephone Number
_______________________________
Authorized Company Signature
_____________________________
Title
________________________________
Date
Recommendation:
GCOED
_______ Yes
_______ No
Date: _________________
_______ No
Date: _________________
Approval of Waiver:
GCOED
_______ Yes
Page 11 of 11
SECTION 01 10 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A.
Project Name: Genesee County Friend of the Court Renovations.
B.
Owner's Name: Genesee County.
C.
Design Professional's Name: THA Architects Engineers.
D.
The Project consists of renovations to existing department offices.
E.
Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and
machinery, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be
incorporated in the Work.
F.
Substantial Completion for Work of this Contract shall be achieved in accordance with the Instructions to
Bidders, Section 00 21 13.
1.02 WORK BY OTHERS
A.
None of the Work included in these Documents shall be performed by "Others", including the Owner's
forces.
1.03 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES
A.
Limit use of premises for work and storage to allow:
1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by Others, including Owner.
3. Use of premises by public.
B.
The Owner will occupy the building during the entire period of construction. It is essential that building and
services be maintained throughout the construction period, with minimum disturbance and disruption to the
Owner's operations, clients and staff.
C.
Welfare of the building occupants is to be considered at all times, including safety, disturbance and
environment. Contractor, subcontractors and all workmen shall be aware of these requirements and
objectives.
D.
The nature of this project is such that close coordination will be required of the Contractor with the Owner
and Others having an interest in the project to assure that work on the site, access to and from the site, and
the general conduct of operations is maintained in a safe and efficient manner.
E.
Contractor shall arrange with Owner to sequence new construction and to make connections to utilities at
such times that shall not interrupt utility services or cause unsatisfactory operations at other buildings or
site locations adjacent to the Project.
F.
Contractor, subcontractors and all workmen shall comply with the Owner's "No Smoking" policy.
1. All property, inside the building and outside on the entire site are designated "DRUG FREE ZONES".
G.
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of all products, materials,
equipment, etc., under this Contract.
H.
Contractor shall obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this
Contract.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 1
1.04 COMPLETION TIME
A.
Entire project is anticipated to be complete and ready for Owner's full occupancy on or before the date
given by the Contractor in the Proposal Form
B.
Under the Contract, a sum of ten percent (10%) will be retained by the Owner until the completion date, the
satisfactory resolution of all items contained in the "Punch List Review" and full occupancy of all areas.
1.05 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
A.
Anything noted in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings and not
noted in the Specifications, is of like effect - as if shown or noted in both.
B.
In case of inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by
addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with Design
Professional interpretation.
C.
On any drawings in which a portion of the Work is detailed or drawn out and the reminder is shown in
outline, the parts detailed or drawn out will also apply to all other like portions of the Work.
D.
When the word "similar" appears on the drawings, it has a general meaning and is not to be interpreted as
meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and connection to the
Work.
E.
In case of any discrepancy in figures, Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor shall submit a written
request to the Design Professional for clarification or interpretation. Any adjustment made by the
Contractor without such a determination, will be at the Contractor's own risk and expense.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A.
This paragraph supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions.
B.
Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.
C.
Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage.
D.
Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for
use.
E.
Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not
materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into
the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment.
F.
Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any), the
contracting requirements, and the specifications.
G.
Provide: To furnish and install.
H.
Supply: Same as Furnish.
1.07 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI's):
A.
In case of any discrepancy in figures, Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor shall submit a written
Request for Information to the Design Professional for clarification or interpretation.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for performing a thorough examination of the Documents prior to submitting
an RFI to verify that the resolution cannot be achieved via the Base Bid Documents (Drawings and
Specifications).
C.
The General Contractor is responsible for answering Requests for Information (RFI's) submitted by subcontractors. If subject of request is not covered on the Drawings or in the Specifications, Contractor shall
forward RFI to Design Professional. Contractor is solely responsible for questions regarding coordination.
RFI's received directly from sub-contractors will not be answered.
D.
All RFI's shall be submitted on the form included in - THA Request for Information, following this section.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 2
E.
The form can be photocopied or scanned for use during this Project by the Contractor and all information
must be typewritten or printed legibly.
F.
RFI's are to be numbered sequentially by the Contractor prior to submission to the Design Professional's
office.
G.
The Design Professional will record the time spent researching the question and if the answer is found
within the Documents, a Credit Change Order will be processed for that amount to recoup the costs
accumulated by THA Architects Engineers to review the RFI from the Contractor.
1.08 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Submit schedule on AIA Form G703. Contractor's standard form or automated printout will be considered
upon request.
B.
Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within ten (10) days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
C.
Schedule shall list the installed value of all components of the Work in detail to serve as a basis for
computing values for progress payments. Material and labor costs shall be individually and separately
itemized for each scope of work.
1.09 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS
A.
Submit three copies of each application as follows:
1. One on an original AIA Form G702, signed and notarized.
2. Two legible copies of original, signed and notarized.
B.
Submit the following with each application:
1. Contractor's Sworn Statement that all bills up to the amount requested have been paid.
C.
Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.
D.
List each authorized Change Order, as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number
and dollar amount as for as original item of Work.
1.10 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A.
In accordance with Article 7 - Changes in the Work; AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition and Section 00 80
00 - Supplementary General Conditions AIA A201
1.11 ALTERNATES
A.
Alternates quoted on Bid Proposal Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option.
B.
Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required for the complete furnishing and
installation of the Alternate as requested.
1.12 CONFERENCES
A.
Design Professional will schedule a preconstruction conference after Notice of Award for all affected
parties.
B.
When deemed necessary by Owner, Design Professional or Contractor convene a pre-installation
conference at project site prior to commencing Work of individual specification Section.
1.13 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility to schedule and administer meetings throughout progress
of the Work at minimum two (2) week intervals.
B.
Preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to participants and those
affected by decisions made.
C.
Attendance of meetings shall be required of the following:
1. Contractor and job superintendent.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 3
2.
3.
D.
Subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to agenda.
Owner, Design Professional and professional consultants may attend as appropriate.
All meetings shall start promptly at the arranged time. Design Professional will record any additional time,
including travel time and mileage, required by late start of, or missed meetings scheduled by Contractor,
sub-contractor or Design Professional, and notify Contractor of charges. Owner shall deduct any such
expenses of Design Professional from Contractor's monthly or periodic pay requests.
COORDINATION AND QUALITY CONTROLS
2.01 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient
and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.
B.
Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for
coordination with related work.
C.
Conduct and participate in meetings among Contractors, Subcontractors, Vendors, Suppliers, and
Fabricators and others concerned, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve
coordination matters in dispute.
D.
Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchorage.
E.
Verify utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities.
F.
Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation and to
resolve conflicts. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable.
G.
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction.
H.
Coordinate requirements for all blocking, backing and grounds necessary for the proper installation of Work
of the various Sections of specifications.
I.
Provide all access panels required by Work of the various Sections of specifications, whether specifically
shown on the Drawings or not.
2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Employ a skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching Work; restore Work with new
Products.
B.
Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering structural or building enclosure elements not
indicated on Drawings.
C.
Use construction industry recognized and acceptable cutting methods to avoid damage to other work or
finishes to remain and which will provide proper surfaces for patching and finishing.
D.
Fit Work tight to adjacent elements. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal
voids.
E.
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
2.03 ALTERATION PROCEDURES
A.
Prepare surfaces by removing existing surface finishes, unsuitable or damage material to provide for proper
installation of new work and new finishes.
B.
Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patch work shall match
existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.
C.
When finish surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing
surface along a straight line at natural line of division.
D.
Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 4
smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
E.
Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
F.
Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish can not be matched,
refinish entire surface to nearest intersection.
2.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,
to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,
codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
2.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to
observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, and to make
appropriate recommendations.
B.
Representative shall submit written report to Design Professional listing observations and
recommendations.
SUBMITTALS
3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES (Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples)
A.
Submittal format to identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; and pertinent Contract Document
references.
B.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review, verification of Products required, field
dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the
requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
C.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to
successful performance of the completed Work.
D.
Revise and resubmit submittals as required; identify all changes made since previous submittal.
E.
Distribute copies of reviewed shop drawings to subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned entities.
F.
Furnish all submittals indicated in individual specification Sections and as summarized in Section 01 33 01 Submittal Summary. The Summary is not to be considered all-inclusive and the Contractor shall thoroughly
review all Sections to ensure that all Submittal Requirements are fulfilled.
G.
Design Professional will review up to two (2) submissions, original and one (1) resubmission of all
submittals made by Contractor. Thereafter, additional reviews will be at Contractor's expense. Design
Professional will record time required reviewing and approving submissions in excess of original and one
resubmission, and notify Contractor of charges. Owner will deduct any such expenses of Design
Professional from Contractor's monthly or periodic pay requests.
3.02 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A.
Certain specification Sections contain an option that permits the use of the Certificate of Compliance
located in Section 01 33 02 in lieu of the procedures described in paragraph 3.01 above.
B.
The form may be photocopied for multiple submissions.
C.
One (1) Certificate of Compliance must be submitted each Section and all data shall be included for each
item specified within that Section.
D.
The Design Professional will review the Certificate(s) and return a photocopy with comments.
3.03 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 5
A.
Contractor shall review, approve and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to
cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples required by the Contract Documents.
B.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, Contractor represents that he
has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto,
or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated information contained within such submittals with
requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
C.
Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents by the Design Professional's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples unless the
Contractor has specially informed the Design Professional in writing of such deviation at the time of
submission and the Design Professional has given written approval to the specified deviation. Contractor
shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples by the Design Professional's approval thereof.
D.
Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples, to revisions other than those requested by Design Professional on previous submittals.
3.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit in accordance with paragraph 3.01 Submittal Procedures.
B.
Submit four (4) sets of Shop Drawings. Two (2) copies will be retained by Design Professional, remaining
copies will be returned to Contractor. Any reproducible Shop Drawings will be noted and returned but
should be inclusive of the four (4) total sets.
C.
Direct copies of Contract Drawings shall not be used for Shop Drawings.
D.
Shop Drawings submitted without being REVIEWED, stamped and signed by the Contractor will NOT be
reviewed.
E.
Any Shop Drawings in excess of the four (4) sets will be returned without notations nor Design Professional
stamp.
3.05 PRODUCT DATA
A.
B.
Submit four (4) copies of Product Data. Two (2) copies will be retained by Design Professional and two (2)
copies will be returned to Contractor.
C.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, performance characteristics, and other
data. Note applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specifications. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information unique to this project.
D.
Contractor shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDA) on all products requiring these sheets.
E.
Product Data submitted without being REVIEWED, stamped and signed by the Contractor will NOT be
reviewed.
F.
Any Submittals in excess of the four (4) sets will be returned without notations nor Design Professional
stamp.
3.06 SAMPLES
A.
B.
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product.
C.
Submit physical samples of finishes applied to the actual material which will be provided from the full range
of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Design Professional selection.
D.
Submit a total quantity of two (2) samples for an individual product.
E.
Contractor shall store one set of samples on site for comparison to field work.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 6
F.
Samples shall become the property of THA Architects Engineers and will not be returned to the Contractor,
vendor or supplier.
G.
Photocopies and/or photographs of the manufacturer’s sample materials will not be reviewed nor returned.
3.07 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES
A.
When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Design Professional
for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B.
Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference
data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
3.08 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A.
Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within ten (10) days after date established in Notice to Proceed
for Design Professional review.
B.
Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version.
Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
C.
Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identifying first
work day of each week.
D.
Show submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data and samples.
TESTING
4.01 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A.
Contractor will employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing.
Proposed firm shall meet the approval of the Design Professional, Owner and the Contractor.
B.
The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services as required by individual
specification sections.
C.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples as requested.
D.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements will be charged to the
Contractor.
E.
Submit minimum of two copies of written report of each test and inspection to the Design Professional.
F.
The testing laboratory is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents, approve or accept any portion of the Work, or stop Work.
4.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A.
Contractor will employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
B.
Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Design Professional indicating observations and
results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Submit a minimum of two copies of each report.
C.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish assistance as requested.
D.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements will be charged to the
Contractor.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
5.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A.
B.
Coordinate with Basic Electrical Requirements, Section 26 00 00.
Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous
service. Owner shall pay for power consumed.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 7
C.
Provide power outlets for construction operations, branch wiring, distribution boxes, and flexible power
cords as required.
5.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A.
Coordinate with Basic Electrical Requirements, Section 26 00 00.
B.
Provide and maintain temporary lighting for construction operations.
C.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps
as required.
5.03 TEMPORARY HEAT
A.
Provide heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations, to protect materials
and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B.
Contractor shall pay cost of energy used by temporary units. When and if, permanent system is utilized,
Owner will pay cost of energy used by permanent system.
C.
Existing gas lines, above or below ground, shall NOT be tapped for use by temporary heating units.
5.04 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of
dust, fumes, vapors, and gases.
B.
Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as
required to maintain clean air for construction operations.
5.05 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A.
Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization.
5.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A.
Connect to existing water source for construction operations. Owner shall pay for water used.
B.
Extend branch piping as required so that water is available by use of hoses.
5.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures in compliance with governing laws and regulations.
Existing facilities may not be used.
B.
Maintain in clean and sanitary condition.
5.08 BARRIERS AND FENCING
A.
Provide as required to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and
adjacent properties from damage.
5.09 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide temporary (insulated when necessary) weather-tight closures of exterior openings to permit
acceptable working conditions and protection of the Work when necessary.
5.10 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A.
B.
Non-Rated Conditions: Provide temporary partitions (and ceilings) as required to separate Work areas
from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to
prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
1. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with
existing surfaces; STC Rating of 35; Flame Spread Rating of 25.
Rated Conditions: Provide temporary partitions as mandated by State of Michigan Life Safety Codes to
separate Work areas from Owner occupied areas and to provide fire-rated walls, including egress doors
where necessary.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 8
1.
C.
Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with
existing surfaces, of one (1) hour construction from floor to roof deck, in accordance with State Fire
Marshal memorandum 16.107. Include 36 inch wide, 20 minute labeled door and frame, with panic
hardware, positive latching, closer, and exit light.
Contractor shall maintain required egress from existing building throughout construction period.
5.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections.
B.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon uncured surfaces.
5.12 SECURITY
A.
Secure as required to protect Work, materials, equipment, tools, etc., and existing facilities from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
5.13 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A.
General Contractor shall provide a temporary office trailer. Office shall be weather-tight lighting, electrical
outlets, heating and ventilating equipment and equipped to provide space for project meeting, with table
and chairs to accommodate ten persons.
1. Prime Subcontractors whose scope of work will extend through the duration of the Project, may
provide a storage shed/trailer onsite., approved by the General Contractor and located in a manner
that is in compliance with local codes.
5.14 CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas under Contractors' control free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in
clean and orderly conditions.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote
spaces, prior to closing space.
C.
Periodically clean interior areas to provide suitable conditions for work.
D.
Clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning on an as needed basis.
E.
Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particles will not adhere to wet or newly coated surfaces.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
6.01 PRODUCTS
A.
No materials or products containing asbestos in manufacturer or application may be used. All products
must be asbestos free.
B.
Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the
Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and
erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components specifically identified for
re-use.
C.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically identified or
allowed by the Contract Documents.
D.
Use interchangeable components of the same manufacture for similar components.
6.02 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Transport, handle, store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Transport products by methods required to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in
manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 9
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.
D.
Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and
products are undamaged.
6.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting those standards
or description.
B.
Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No options or substitutions allowed.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and
meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
D.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a
request for substitution for any manufacturer not named on Substitution Request Form included in Section
01 10 01.
6.04 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Instructions to Bidders, Section 00 21 13 specifies the time for submitting requests for substitutions during
the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section.
B.
After Award of Contract substitutions will only be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through
no fault of the Contractor.
C.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
D.
Submit requests for proposed substitution on Substitution Request Form included at end of Division 1.
When substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. Limit each request to one proposed
substitution.
E.
Should a substitution be approved and then prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for its
intended service, the Contractor shall, replace same with the material originally specified without cost to
Owner or obligation on the part of the Design Professional. (i.e., all substitutions must carry a warranty
guaranteeing they are equal to specified items.)
6.05 STARTING SYSTEMS
A.
Ensure that each piece of equipment or system is ready for operation.
B.
Execute start-up under supervision of responsible persons in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Submit two copies of a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is
functioning correctly.
6.06 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel prior to date of Substantial
Completion.
B.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six
months.
C.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and
shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location.
6.07 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Provide Products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual
specification Sections.
B.
Deliver to and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment as directed by the Owner.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 10
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
7.01 CONTRACTOR CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and
Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for the Design Professional's final
inspection.
B.
Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and
amount remaining due.
C.
Submit with final Application for Payment a minimum of two copies of each of the following:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificate of Inspection from Governing Authorities for mechanical and electrical systems.
3. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
4. Warranties and Guarantees.
5. Operation and Maintenance Data.
a. Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and
major equipment suppliers.
6. Affidavits that the following Interior Finish Materials meet specified fire rating classification:
a. Acoustical ceiling tiles.
b. Plastic lens of lighting fixtures.
7. Contractor Certification of Asbestos-Free Product Installation Form.
D.
Advise Owner of pending insurance change over requirements.
E.
Create a "Completion List" for the Project which shall be itemized in the order of the room names and
numbers assigned in the "Room Finish Schedule". This list should include all deficiencies and omissions
for each room with a brief description of each item, sequentially numbered. This list shall be distributed to
all contractors for their review and resolution and a copy is to be submitted to THA Architects Engineers
when all items have been resolved satisfactorily and the Contractor is ready for the Design Professional's
inspection of the work.
F.
When the Design Professional completes the "Punch List Review", a Certificate of Substantial Completion AIA G704 will be published which will include a copy of the "Punch List Review". The Contractor and/or
Subcontractor will be allowed a maximum of ninety (90) calendar days from the Date of Substantial
Completion to satisfactorily resolve all items contained in the "Punch List Review" or negotiate with the
Design Professional to arrive at a mutually accepted reduced quantity of items. On the ninety-first (91st)
day following the Date of Substantial Completion, the sum of one thousand ($1,000.00) dollars will be
deducted from the Contract Sum for each calendar day that the Punch List remains unresolved unless the
Contact is extended by Change Order. This amount represents liquidated damages that will be suffered by
the Owner.
G.
Design Professional will make up to two (2) inspections of final Work. Thereafter, additional re-inspections
will be at Contractor's and/or Subcontractor's expense. Design Professional will record time, including
travel time and mileage, required in making re-inspections and notify Contractor of charges. Owner will
deduct any such expenses of Design Professional from Contractor's and/or Subcontractor's final pay
request.
7.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit two (2) sets prior to final payment, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders
with durable plastic hardback covers and suitable index.
B.
Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", and title of
project.
C.
Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized, with tab titling
clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents:
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 11
1.
2.
E.
Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major
equipment suppliers.
Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system.
Project documents, certificates and test data.
1. Warranties and Guarantees.
7.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site, one set of Contract Documents to be utilized for record documents; including all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data,
and Samples.
B.
Record actual revisions to the Work. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
C.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product Section a description of actual Products installed.
D.
Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction.
E.
Submit set of record documents to Design Professional with final Application for Payment.
F.
Maintain on site, manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test reports, and other
documents required by individual specification sections.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
8.01 FINAL CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. Provide all necessary general "house cleaning" to provide a
ready to move into facility without additional cleaning being required by the Owner.
B.
Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Damp mop and
buff resilient and hard surface floors. Clean transparent, glossy and reflective surfaces to a clear shine.
C.
Clean light fixtures and lamps.
D.
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
E.
If Contractor fails to clean up at completion of the Work, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be
charged to the Contractor.
8.02 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
WARRANTIES
9.01 WARRANTIES
A.
Provide duplicate copies.
B.
Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C.
Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
D.
Warranty Requirements:
1. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not
relieve Contractor of the warranty on Work that incorporates produces, nor does it relieve suppliers,
manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor.
2. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace
other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure ot that must be removed and replaced to
provide access for correction of warranted work.
3. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. Reinstated warranty shall
be equal to original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 12
4.
5.
E.
Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild
work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is
responsible for cost ot replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether Owner has
benefitted from use of work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall
not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall
warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties,
obligations, rights, or remedies.
Furnish all warranties indicated in individual specification Sections as well as a One (1) Year General
Contractor's and a One (1) Year Subcontractor's labor and material Warranty for work performed within this
Project. These Warranties shall be submitted on the company's letterhead stationary, signed by a
corporate officer or owner of the firm and notarized.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
01 10 00 - Page 13
SECTION 01 10 01
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Project: Genesee County Friend of the Court Renovations
Contractor/Vend
orName:
Address:
Telephone:
Contact Person:
B.
Reference:
Drawing Sheet
No.:
Specification
Section:
Paragraph
Number:
Specified
Product
Manufacturer:
C.
Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will
require for its proper installation.
Proposed
Substitution
(Mfg., Model No.,
Etc.):
D.
Submit with request, all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance
to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance.
E.
Fill in the blanks:
1. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on the Drawings?
a. Yes____ No____ If yes, clearly indicate changes:
b.
Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing
costs caused by the requested substitution?
1) Yes____ No____ If no, fully explain:
Job #09270
01 10 01 - Page 1
F.
c.
What affect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades?
d.
What affect does substitution have on construction schedule?
e.
f.
Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are:
1) Same____
Different_______ (explain on an attachment)
Reason for Request:
g.
h.
Attach itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution.
Attach accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified.
Certification of Equal Performance and Assumption of Ability for Equal Performance:
1. The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the
specified item.
Name
Title
Signature
Date
a. Signature above shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms.
Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval.
2. For use by Design Professional
Accepted
Remarks:
Accepted as Noted
Not Accepted
Received Too Late
By:
Date:
END OF REQUEST FORM
Job #09270
01 10 01 - Page 2
SECTION 01 10 02
CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION OF ASBESTOS-FREE PRODUCT INSTALLATION FORM
PROJECT NAME & NO:
BUILDING NAME:
STREET ADDRESS:
CITY, STATE, ZIP:
GENESEE COUNTY FRIEND OF THE COURT RENOVATIONS - #09-270
GENESEE COUNTY ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
1101 BEACH STREET
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
STREET ADDRESS:
CITY, STATE, ZIP:
WORK SCOPE:
RELATED SPECIFICATION
SECTION(S):
SUMMARY OF PRODUCTS/
MATERIALS INSTALLED:
I, ____________________________________ , REPRESENTING
___________________________________
PRINT OR TYPE NAME
COMPANY NAME
HEREBY ATTEST THAT ANY AND ALL PRODUCTS/MATERIALSTHAT THIS COMPANY HAS
INTRODUCED INTO THE ABOVE-MENTIONED PROJECT AND BUILDING(S), ARE IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND ARE ASBESTOS-FREE (OR LESS THAN ONE PERCENT
ASBESTOS BY WEIGHT).
SIGNATURE
COMPANY
TITLE
ADDRESS
DATE
CITY/STATE/ZIP
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION OF ASBESTOS-FREE PRODUCT INSTALLATION FORM
01 10 02 - Page 1
SECTION 01 10 04
THA ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER POLICY
THA ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS (THA) WILL PROVIDE ELECTRONIC FILES FOR THE PURPOSE OF
PREPARING SHOP DRAWINGS, SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING:
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
A.
THA’s electronic files are compatible with AutoCAD Release 14.
1. THA makes no representation as to the compatibility of these files with your hardware or software
beyond their release specifications.
2. Layer names are based on the AIA CAD Layer Guidelines.
B.
Data contained on these electronic files is part of THA’s instruments of service and shall not be used by
you or anyone else receiving this data through or from you for any purpose other than as a convenience in
the preparation of shop drawings for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse will be at the sole risk
and without liability or legal exposure to THA. You agree to make no claim and hereby waive, to the fullest
extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against THA, which may arise out of or
in connection with your use of the electronic files.
C.
Furthermore you shall, by the fullest extent permitted by the law, indemnify and hold harmless THA from all
claims, damages, losses and expenses, including any attorneys’ fees arising out of or resulting from your
use of these electronic files.
D.
These electronic files are not contract documents and THA makes no representation regarding the
accuracy or completeness of the electronic documents you receive. By your use of these electronic files,
you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without
limitation, the need to check, confirm, and coordinate all dimensions and details, take field measurements,
verify field conditions, and coordinate your work with that of other contractors for the project.
1. Titles, dates, dimensions, notes, and other data may be deleted from these files.
2. Significant differences may exist between the electronic files and corresponding hard copy contract
documents due to addenda, change orders, or other revisions.
3. In the event a conflict arises between the signed documents prepared by THA and the electronic files,
the signed contract documents shall govern.
E.
Because of the potential that the information presented on the electronic files can be modified,
unintentionally or otherwise, THA reserves the right to remove all indication of it’s ownership and/or
involvement for each electronic display.
F.
A service fee of $200.00 per file shall be payable to THA upon delivery of the electronic files.
G.
Under no circumstances shall the delivery of the electronic files for your use by you be deemed a sale by
THA, and THA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, of the merchantability and fitness for any
particular purpose. In no event shall THA be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages.
H.
THA will provide the electronic files as indicated by name, file size, and date on the attached transmittal.
By your acceptance of these electronic files, you agree to the terms and conditions as stated above.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
THA ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER POLICY
01 10 04 - Page 1
SECTION 01 10 05
THA BULLETIN PRICING FORMAT
PRICING BREAKDOWNS SHALL ONLY BE SUBMITTED FOLLOWING A PUBLISHED BULLETIN
Upon receipt of the Bulletin, the General Contractor has the responsibility to:
A.
Submit cost quotation, in detail, as promptly as possible. It must be dated and signed. Lump sum proposals
will not be accepted and will be returned to the General Contractor for resubmittal.
B.
Prepare the cost breakdown for each item in the Bulletin, individually & separately, in detail, using the
following format and including the material, labor, labor fringes, equipment costs and overhead/profit as
allowed by the Contract Documents.
Each Bulletin Item shall be quoted using the following general format:
Bulletin #-- Item #-C.
Material Cost:
1. List all material items by unit cost x total units = cost
2. Add applicable sales tax
3. Add applicable shipping costs
4. State the Subtotal of the Material Costs
D.
Labor Cost:
1. List each trade and the hourly rate x quantity of hours = cost/hour
(Including the burden for fringe benefits, pension, FICA, etc.)
2. State the Subtotal of the Labor Costs
E.
Equipment Cost:
1. Rental charge or equivalent daily cost, including operating costs excluding labor x total days = cost
2. State the Subtotal of the Equipment Costs
F.
State the Subtotal for all Material, Labor and Equipment Costs as shown above.
G.
Overhead & Profit Cost:
1. Percentage allowed by the General Requirements of the Contract for work performed by the General
Contractor’s forces or by Subcontractor’s forces.
2. State the Subtotal of the O & P Costs
Each Bulletin Item shall be summarized individually & separately:
Clearly identify the Bulletin number and Item number TOTAL costs (or credits) calculated from the
breakdown shown above.
Each pricing submittal shall include a signature block in a format similar to this:
Signed ______________________________________
Date_______________________
Printed/Typed Name____________________________
Company____________________________________
ATTACH ALL PRICING DOCUMENTATION. SUBMITTALS LACKING COMPLETE AND THOROUGH
BACKUP DATA WILL BE RETURNED TO THE CONTRACTOR WITHOUT REVIEW.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
THA BULLETIN PRICING FORMAT
01 10 05 - Page 1
SECTION 01 10 06
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
RFI NO:
DATE:
General Contractor/Contractor/Subcontractor to perform thorough review of the documents prior to
submitting RFI to Design Professional.
REQUIRED INFORMATION
Project Name:
Project No:
Contractor Name:
Street Address:
City, State, ZIP:
Telephone No:
FAX Number:
Contact Person:
Cellular No:
Subcontractor:
Drawing Page No:
Specification Section:
SUBJECT:
RESPONSE:
R
Date
Job #09270
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
01 10 06 - Page 1
SECTION 01 33 01
SUBMITTAL SUMMARY
INSTRUCTIONS
The Specification Sections listed on the following pages include, but are not limited to, the sections
that require formal submittals for the Design Professional’s review.
Contractors shall thoroughly review all sections to insure that all Product Data, Shop Drawings,
Samples, Certificates and other documents are submitted in a timely and accurate manner.
Job #09270
SUBMITTAL SUMMARY
01 33 01 - Page 1
SECTIONS CONTAINING SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS
Product
Shop
Data Drawings Samples
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
N
Y
N
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 41 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 42 16 - WOOD-VENEER PANELING
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 81 00 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING
Y
N
N
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 12 13 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 33 13 - COILING COUNTER DOORS
08 56 59 - BULLET RESISTANT TRANSACTION WINDOW
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
08 80 00 - GLAZING
08 88 56 - BALLISTICS-RESISTANT GLAZING
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING
09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 07 19 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 06 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION
23 07 19 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 09 01 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
23 22 13 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
23 22 14 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING SPECIALTIES
23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Job #09270
Submittals
Page 1
06/05/12
23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 82 16 - AIR COILS
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS
26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
26 28 13 - FUSES
26 28 18 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 29 13 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 52 01 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 10 01 - COMMUNICATION AND DATA-PROCESSING CABLING
27 51 17 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Y
Y
N
Job #09270
Submittals
Page 2
06/05/12
SECTION 01 33 02
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
INTENT
Miscellaneous Specification Sections within this Manual have been designated to forego the Submittal
process if the proposed products are exactly as described in the Section(s). The Contractor,
Subcontractor, Vendor or Fabricator shall complete this/these form(s) and submit it to the Design
Professional for review and acceptance based on the terms outlined herein.
PROJECT DATA
Project Name:
Project No:
Street Address:
City, State, ZIP
Genesee County Friend of the Court Renovations
09-270
1101 Beach Street
Flint, Michigan 48502
CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR/VENDOR/FABRICATOR
Company
Name:
Street Address:
City, State, ZIP:
SUBMITTAL DATA
Section Title:
Section No:
Description of
product,
equipment,
part, item,
fabrication, etc.
The undersigned hereby certifies and guarantees that all aspects of the product, fixture, equipment,
furnishing, part, fabrication or item described above shall comply fully with the Specifications for this
Project.
The undersigned further agrees that all conflicts that arise relative to the fit and finish of these products
with adjacent facets of the Work shall be resolved by the Contractor, Subcontractor, Vendor or
Fabricator in a manner approved by the Owner and Design Professional with any additional costs borne
by the undersigned representative's company.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE FORM SIGNATURE
____________________________________________
(Supplier - print the full name of your firm)
____________________________________________
(Signature and Title)
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
01 33 02 - Page 1
SECTION 01 33 03
CERTIFICATE SUMMARY
INSTRUCTIONS
The following Summary includes, but is not limited to, sections that require a Certificate of Compliance
for products, fixtures, equipment, furnishings, parts, fabrications or items that will be installed in this
Project.
Contractors shall thoroughly review all sections to insure that all Certificates are submitted as
specified.
Job #09270
CERTIFICATE SUMMARY
01 33 03 - Page 1
SECTIONS CONTAINING CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 01 00 - MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING
07 90 05 - JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 90 00 - PAINTING AND COATING
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPING
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 82 16 - AIR COILS
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 51 17 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Job #09270
Certificate
Page 1
06/05/12
SECTION 01 41 01
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
Job #09270
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
01 41 01 - Page 1
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements:
1. Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
2. Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
B.
NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,
sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures
and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.
3. Use of explosives is not permitted.
4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structural elements to be
removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.
5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public.
7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants.
8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.
9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct
required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.
10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse,
infringe upon or limit access to their property.
B.
Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
C.
Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.
D.
Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified measures have been
taken to protect vegetation to remain.
E.
Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring.
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
Job #09270
DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - Page 1
F.
Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,
sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
G.
If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Design Professional
and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
B.
Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior
written notification to Owner.
D.
Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days
prior written notification to Owner.
E.
Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type;
protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.
F.
Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and
abandoned utilities.
G.
Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify
and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain.
3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A.
Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing
record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Design Professional before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent
upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B.
Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction.
C.
Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or
modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
D.
Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new
construction specified.
2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
E.
Remove all incidental items, (re: trims, fasteners, wiring, conduit, mounting plates, etc.) not required by
and/or interfering with new construction or finishes, whether specifically shown or not.
F.
At existing wall or partition openings scheduled for infill, remove any bullnose masonry units and partial (cut)
units back to nearest mortar joint so that new masonry may be toothed in to match existing bond patterns.
G.
Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Telecommunications, and
Data): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and
operational components.
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services,
maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.
3. See Section 01 10 00 for other limitations on outages and required notifications.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings;
remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.
DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
H.
Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A.
Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B.
Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; do not burn or bury.
C.
Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
D.
Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
3.05 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS TO BE REMOVED AND RETAINED
A.
Owner shall have the "Right of First Refusal" on any item removed during demolition. If Owner does not
exercise that right, Contractor shall dispose of all items off site in a legal manner.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - Page 3
SECTION 02 82 06
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT
A.
SECTION 02080.000
Sections of Division 2 were developed to entail general technical requirements for the remediation of
asbestos-containing building materials (ACBM) throughout all Abatement Phase s. At all times during the
actual work on site, it must be remembered that all state and federal regulations must be adhered to, as
well as current, state-of the-art abatement techniques. If, at any time, the proposed abatement technique is
opposed by either the Owner or the Consultant, then it must be altered sufficiently for acceptance, or not
employed at all.
1.02 PROJECT SCOPE OUTLINE
SECTION 02080.100
A.
The following sections provide detailed descriptions of the work involved to complete the various tasks in
the Scope of Work.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for removal of any/all asbestos-containing materials (regardless of actual
quantities encountered) throughout the defined work areas.
1.03 FRIEND OF THE COURT (FOC) SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 02080.101.1
A.
The base bid work area is comprised of the east portion of the first floor, B (south) wing of the
Administration Building. The alternate bid 1 work area is comprised of the west portion of the first floor, B
(south) wing of the Administration Building.
B.
Scope of Work activities common to all areas shall include:
1. Erection of steel stud and drywall or OSB semi-permanent barrier walls to close off any work space
entrances from building portions remaining in use by Genesee County staff or the general public.
2. Removal, decontamination and placement for storage of salvageable building components (e.g.-doors
and hardware) as designated at a location on site by Genesee County personnel.
3. Enclosure construction as outlined in Sections 02080.130 and 02080.275-279.
a. Installation of poly knee wall bulkhead barriers between ceiling tile elevation and roof deck
elevation in locations where firewalls do not extend up to the deck, in order to isolate work area
spaces from occupied building spaces. The top attachments of these bulkhead knee walls will be
wrapped around firring strips, which will be affixed to the roof deck with “Ramset” type
attachments or equivalent.
1) Decontamination facility construction as outlined in Section 02080.301. The decontamination
facility location(s) will be mutually agreed upon by the Abatement Foreman and the
Consultant prior to work.
b. Installation of sufficient HEPA filter equipped air filtration devices (AFD) to create a NESHAP
defined negative pressure environment.
1) AFDs will be exhausted from the work area to the outside environment.
(a) The contractor is responsible for securing these exhaust areas so that access to the
vents is not possible, and that egress through the exhaust vent areas is not possible
throughout project duration.
c. Removal and disposal of all carpeting, vinyl cove base (mop boards) and associated glue within
the enclosure work space.
1) Carpeting may be disposed of as normal construction trash if carpet removal is performed
prior to any asbestos abatement, and VAT does not stay attached to the carpet as it is
removed.
2) Any carpeting to which VAT remains attached, or which is removed after abatement
commencement must be disposed of as asbestos material.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 1
d.
De-energizing, cleaning and disposing of suspended light fixtures. The contractor has the option
to leave enough lights in each work area to provide work space illumination during abatement.
Lights that are left to provide illumination will be pre-cleaned, re-suspended, and sealed in poly.
After abatement, as part of tear down and de-mobilization, these fixtures will be properly disposed
of as ACM.
e. Removal and disposal of all ceiling tiles in the work area(s) as asbestos waste.
f.
Removal and washing off of ceiling tile gridwork for disposal of the gridwork as non-ACM.
g. Demolition and disposal as asbestos contaminated of any work area plaster ceilings in order to
expose fireproofing above.
h. Removal, washing off for decontamination and disposal as general construction waste, or
recycling as salvageable material of all sheet metal supply ducting contained within the work area,
as shown on the drawings.
1) Removal of duct material as shown on drawings includes: removal of associated pneumatic
tubing, duct control boxes, thermostats, other controls; sealing off of pneumatic lines with
compression or solder fittings; cleaning, decontamination and salvaging of tempering coils
and accessories.
2) Flex tube sections and diffusers will either be cleaned and disposed of as general
construction waste, or disposed of as asbestos contaminated.
3) All supply duct openings created by demolition activities will be blanked off with metal or
wood, and sealed.
i.
Blanking off with metal or wood any and all return air ducts that open into the work area enclosure.
j.
Demolition of select plaster or drywall ceilings and walls, or brick wall sections as indicated on
drawings.
k. Demolition of all casework as listed on the drawings.
l.
Selective demolition of gypsum board and stud wall sections and masonry wall sections as
required for new openings as shown on drawings.
m. Proper removal and disposal of any and all mud fitting material on fiberglass insulated lines, and
fireproofing material sprayed on ceiling beams, ceiling decking, all components within the work
space, exposed columns, and on the tops of support columns that haven't been exposed. This
includes any and all suspect overspray material on any surfaces in the work areas.
1.04 MATERIAL QUANTITY ESTIMATES
A.
SECTION 02080.103
All amounts, quantities and locations of materials listed in the Section are approximations only. They are
listed as an aid to the Contractor to assist in determining the Scope of Work involved. The Owner and
Consultant assume no liability for errors or omissions to the material amounts listed. It should be noted that
the actual quantities are the responsibility of the contractor. Any/all material which is known or assumed will
be the responsibility of the contractor, regardless of amounts given herein.
1. Material approximations are as follows:
MATERIAL TYPE
APPROXIMATE AMOUNT
East Work Section
Ceiling tile
6,150 ft2
Drywall partition wall sections
4,460 ft2
Carpeting
4,732 ft2
VAT and mastic
6,480 ft2
Ceiling/Beam fireproofing & overspray
18,360 ft2
West Work Section
Ceiling tile
3,384 ft2
Drywall partition wall sections
2,060 ft2
Carpeting
1,500 ft2
VAT and mastic
3,160 ft2
Ceiling/Beam fireproofing & overspray
7,750 ft2
2. Mud fittings will be counted in each work area, with the counts verified by the Owner's representative.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 2
Job #09270
1.05 ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02080.140
A.
Full enclosure construction is required for abatement in all work areas:
1. All critical air movement areas, wall fixtures, light switches, vents, grates, drains, windows, etc. shall
be sealed with one layer of 6 mil poly sheeting, as per Section 02080.277.
2. All other fixed objects shall be wrapped and sealed in one layer of 6 mil poly as per Section 02080.275.
3. Loose running telecommunication, data, computer, etc. wires will be bundled together and secured as
well as possible. They cannot be left unsecured.
4. At least two layers of 6 mil poly shall be installed over all permanent walls and surfaces, as per
Section 02080.278. At least two layers of 6 mil poly will be erected for any free standing enclosure
walls. Poly enclosure walls will be attached to permanent building walls with firring strips; spray glue
and duct tape above the height of the drop ceilings, so that the spray glue and duct tape residue is not
visible once new ceilings are installed, and so the enclosure remains intact throughout abatement. Poly
bulkhead knee walls shall also be attached to the roof deck with firring strips, spray glue and duct tape.
5. Flooring shall consist of at least two layers of 6 mil poly, to act as a permanent enclosure floor.
a. All seams shall be overlapped, and duct taped. All wall layers shall extend at least 6” up side
walls.
b. A final poly layer shall then be installed to act as a drop cloth. The drop cloth shall cover the
entire floor space of the area, and shall remain in place until removal and clean up of gross debris
is complete. The drop cloth shall be picked up and disposed of as asbestos waste prior to final
clean up of the work area.
B.
A visual inspection of all work areas will be conducted by the Sierra representative after completion of
enclosure construction to assess the integrity of the work areas. Approval must be received from
the Consultant prior to commencement of abatement in any work area.
C.
The Contractor shall bear the financial responsibility for material replacement or clean up if any
permanent facility building component or material becomes damaged or contaminated in any way as a
result of any abatement activities.
1.06 DECONTAMINATION FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
A.
A decontamination facility shall be constructed for use in each separate work area, as per Section
02080.301. Each shall be attached to the enclosure so that it is a contiguous part of the regulated work
area. The entire building floor area over which the decontamination area is erected will be covered in one
layer minimum of rubber matting (e.g.-Duro-last type rubber membrane), then with the required poly layers.
Showers shall be the aluminum framed, collapsible type, with hard plumbing hot and cold water
connections, a drain pan and separate hard plumbing drain connection. Portable poly chambers are not
acceptable as showers.
1.07 BAG OUT FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
A.
SECTION 02080.142
SECTION 02080.144
A separate port shall be constructed as per Section 02080.311 for waste material removal, where feasible. If
construction of a separate waste material bag out port is not feasible, the decontamination facility shall be
used for transport of waste material out of the work area.
1.08 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 02080.146
A.
After enclosure construction but prior to commencement of removal in any work area, a pressure differential
environment shall be established and maintained, as per Sections 02080.330-333.
B.
A constant reading negative pressure monitoring and recording device (manometer) is required for use on
all enclosures. The contractor is responsible for supply and operation of the device(s).
C.
The number of machines required will be determined by the Contractor, and approved by the Consultant. At
least one spare back up unit will be kept on site for the duration of the project.
D.
A maintenance log shall be shown to the Consultant for the AFDs brought on site in order to show the age
of each units HEPA filter. If a log is not available, then new HEPA filters shall be installed in every unit at
the start of the project.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 3
E.
The Contractor shall vent the AFDs to the outside atmosphere.
1.09 ORDER OF WORK
SECTION 02080.148
A.
Genesee County personnel will remove furniture, paperwork, and other non-essential items from the work
area(s).
B.
General Contractor personnel will remove all non-asbestos contaminated doors, hardware, other fixtures
scheduled for salvage.
C.
The contractor will complete all pre-abatement critical barrier and enclosure set up procedures, including
semi-permanent partition wall construction to isolate the work zones, decontamination facility erection and
establishment of a pressure differential environment as listed above.
1. Non asbestos materials such as carpeting, cove base and adhesive may be removed at this time.
D.
Next, ceiling tiles shall be carefully removed, bagged, and passed out of the work area. Ceiling tile removal
will begin at any locations where poly bulkheads need to be installed. Once these immediate tiles have
been removed, the contractor shall install two layer, 6 mil poly bulkhead knee walls up to the roof deck.
E.
The ceiling tile gridwork will be removed, cleaned and recycled or disposed of as non-ACM.
F.
Drywall office partiton walls will be dismantled.
1. Metal hardware and attachments will be cleaned and recycled or disposed of as non-ACM.
2. Light switches and/or electrical outlets in the panels will be de-energized, disconnected and disposed
of as asbestos.
a. Simultaneous with wall panel dismantling, the contractor will be responsible to de-energize the
electrical circuitry found in the wall panels, then detach the electrical wiring/conduit back to the
nearest junction box above ceiling level. After detachment, isolation, labeling of the wires as to
usage, and sealing of wire ends as per accepted electrical code standards, the contractor may
re-energize circuits, if necessary, to provide power for abatement equipment to remaining outlets.
b. Also, simultaneous with wall demolition, the contractor will be responsible to pre-clean, protect,
and secure from damage any existing telecommunication, computer, etc. wiring and cables
remaining in work areas.
3. Partitions will be wetted, double wrapped in 6 mil poly, sealed and labeled for disposal as ACM.
G.
Lights will be de-energized, disconnected, and disposed of as asbestos. Lights to be used for abatement
illumination will be protected with poly, and re-suspended with tie wire.
1. When removing lights, electrical outlets, light switches or other wired components, the abatement
contractor will snip or otherwise disconnect the wiring as close to the fixture as possible, seal the open
wire ends with wire nuts and tape or poly, tape the wires together, label the wires as to usage (e.g. light fixture, electrical outlet, etc.), and affix the wires so that they are out of the way of other
abatement tasks.
H.
Insulation on all air ducts in the work area will be removed and disposed of as asbestos contaminated.
I.
The ends of the ducts supplying air to the perimeter diffusers feeding to the second floor above will be
disconnected at the joint nearest the diffuser grille. This opening will be blanked off with plywood or sheet
metal and sealed. The removed section will be decontaminated and cleaned, and passed out of the
enclosure for storage and re-use.
J.
Flex tubes and diffusers supplying air through the ceiling tile grid system will be removed and disposed of
as ACM. The opening in the duct trunks created from removal of the flex tubes will be blanked off with sheet
metal or plywood and sealed.
K.
All remaining ducting in the work area will be cleaned, decontaminated, and sealed in two layers minimum
of 6 mil poly
L.
All return ducts opening into the work area will be blanked off with sheet metal or plywood and sealed.
M. Any other select interior demolition as called for will then take place.
N.
Any plaster/drywall ceiling demolition as called for will then take place to expose fireproofing in these
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 4
Job #09270
areas.
O.
Only then shall friable spray on fireproofing and mud fitting abatement begin. Friable removal will start at the
opposite end of the enclosure from the decon. An airless sprayer shall be operated continuously using a
mixture of water and surfactant during friable material removal.
P.
Friable material removal and clean up shall proceed in an orderly progression toward the decon. end of the
enclosure. All debris must be cleaned up as it is created. Debris will not be allowed to accumulate within the
enclosure. All debris will be re-wetted with a garden hose prior to final sealing in bags or drums.
Q.
Final cleaning of all enclosure surfaces will take place once gross removal is completed.
R.
Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tile and mastic removal will occur upon completion of fireproofing removal and clean
up.
1. Mastic removal will be completed using mechanical means (e.g - shot or bead blasting with a HEPA
filter equipped vacuum system attached and operating throughout the blasting procedure; wet method
grinding, scarifying).
S.
The Consultant shall perform visual inspections of each work area throughout abatement procedures, and
also upon completion of all removal and clean up operations, prior to final encapsulation and air sampling.
At least one contractor representative must accompany. Any items noted by the Consultant will be
addressed prior to proceeding to the next order of work.
T.
Post abatement air sampling conducted by the Consultant will be the final order of work.
1.10 WORK AREA PREPARATION
A.
SECTION 02080.103
All steps outlined under Sections 02080.270 - 02080.282 will be followed.
1.11 ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02080.140
A.
Full enclosure construction requirements area as follows:
1. All critical air movement areas, wall fixtures, light switches, vents, grates, drains, windows, etc. shall
be sealed with one layer of 6 mil poly sheeting, as per Section 02080.277.
2. All other fixed objects shall be wrapped and sealed in one layer of 6 mil poly as per Section 02080.275.
3. Loose running telecommunication, data, computer, etc. wires will be bundled together and secured as
well as possible. They cannot be left unsecured.
4. At least two layers of 6 mil poly shall be installed over all permanent walls and surfaces, as per
Section 02080.278. At least two layers of 6 mil poly will be erected for any free standing enclosure
walls. Poly enclosure walls will be attached to permanent building walls with firring strips, spray glue
and duct tape above the height of the drop ceilings, so that the spray glue and duct tape residue is not
visible once new ceilings are installed, and so the enclosure remains intact throughout abatement. Poly
bulkhead walls shall also be attached to the roof deck with firring strips, spray glue and duct tape.
5. Where VAT is not present, flooring shall consist of at least two layers of 6 mil poly, to act as a
permanent enclosure floor.
a. All seams shall be overlapped, and duct taped. All wall layers shall extend at least 6” up side
walls.
b. A final third poly layer shall then be installed to act as a drop cloth. The drop cloth shall cover the
entire floor space of the area, and shall remain in place until removal and clean up of gross debris
is complete. The drop cloth shall be picked up and disposed of as asbestos waste prior to final
clean up of the work area.
6. Where VAT is present, flooring shall consist of at least one layer of 6 mil poly, to act as a drop cloth.
This layer will be removed and replaced if it becomes damaged or torn and fireproofing debris falls to
the floor during removal activities.
B.
A visual inspection of all work areas will be conducted by the Sierra representative after completion of
enclosure construction to assess the integrity of the work areas. Approval must be received from
the Consultant prior to commencement of abatement in any work area.
C.
The Contractor shall bear the financial responsibility for material replacement or clean up if any permanent
facility building component or material becomes damaged or contaminated in any way as a result of any
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 5
abatement activities.
A.
A decontamination facility shall be constructed for use in each separate work area, as per Section
02080.301. Each shall be attached to the enclosure so that it is a contiguous part of the regulated work
area. The entire building floor area over which the decontamination area is erected will be covered in one
layer minimum of rubber matting (eg-Duro-last type rubber membrane), then with the required poly layers.
Showers shall be the aluminum framed, collapsible type, with hard plumbing hot and cold water
connections, a drain pan and separate hard plumbing drain connection. Portable poly chambers are not
acceptable as showers.
1.13 BAG-OUT FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
A.
SECTION 02080.142
SECTION 02080.144
A separate port shall be constructed as per Section 02080.311 for waste material removal, where feasible. If
construction of a separate waste material bag out port is not feasible, the decontamination facility shall be
used for transport of waste material out of the work area.
1.14 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 02080.146
A.
After enclosure construction but prior to commencement of removal in any work area, a pressure differential
environment shall be established and maintained, as per Sections 02080.330-333.
B.
A constant reading negative pressure monitoring and recording device (manometer) is required for use on
all enclosures. The contractor is responsible for supply and operation of the device(s).
C.
The number of machines required will be determined by the Contractor, and approved by the Consultant. At
least one spare back up unit will be kept on site for the duration of the project.
D.
A maintenance log shall be shown to the Consultant for the AFDs brought on site in order to show the age
of each units HEPA filter. If a log is not available, then new HEPA filters shall be installed in every unit at
the start of the project.
E.
The Contractor shall vent the AFDs to the outside atmosphere.
POSTING SECTION 02080.200
2.01 REGULATIONS
A.
Section 02080.201
The Contractor will have at all times in their possession at their office (one copy), and in view at the job site
(one copy) each of the following:
1. U.S. Department of Labor: OSHA Regulation. 29 CFR Part 1926.58, 1926.1101 - Construction Industry
Asbestos Standard. June 1986; Amended, August 1994, June, 1995.
2. USEPA. 1984. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
a. National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 40 CFR 61. April 5, 1984. Amended,
November 1990.
a. Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule and Notice. 40 CFR 763. Federal Register,
October 30, 1987.
a. Asbestos Abatement Projects, Worker Protection, Final Rule. 40 CFR 763. February 1987.
5. Michigan Public Acts
a. Act 154 of 1974 and Act 147 of 1986 - Occupational Health and Safety Act.
b. Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services Director's Office Occupational Health
Standards, Rev. 10/97.
6. As well as any additional, updated federal, state, and local guidance related to asbestos abatement.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 6
Job #09270
2.02 RESPIRATION PROTECTION PROGRAM
A.
(one copy), a respirator protection program that meets all requirements as stated in 29 CFR Part 1910.134
and 29 CFR Part 1926.58, 1926.1101, and any related documentation for all workers participating in the
project as stated in the above named regulations.
2.03 ACCREDITATION
A.
SECTION 02080.203
(one copy), proof of required accreditation under Michigan Act No. 439 of 1988 (Employer Penalty Act) and
Michigan Act No. 440 of 1988 (Workers Accreditation Act), of all workers employed by the Contractor for
asbestos abatement on this project.
2.04 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)
A.
SECTION 02080.205
The Contractor shall post in the vicinity of the clean room area of the worker decontamination enclosure, a
list containing, at a minimum, the names, address and telephone numbers of the Contractor, Consultant,
Field Superintendent, and any other personnel who may be required to assist during the abatement
activities, for example, building maintenance staff and Supervisor(s), Superintendent, etc. (see Division 2,
Section 02080.351). Also, the Contractor shall post a sign-in sheet for persons entering and leaving the
enclosure. The contractor shall post, in a central conspicuous place, a document that details the Michigan
Occupational Safety and Health Act, as well as a notice from the Michigan Civil Rights Commission that
outlines discrimination prohibitions. Additionally the contractor shall post documents from the U.S.
Department of Labor dealing with Equal Opportunity Employment, Federal Minimum Wage laws, the
Employee Polygraph Protection Act and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. All of the above
documents shall be prominently displayed near the entrance to the work site.
NOTIFICATION
SECTION 02080.220
3.01 ABATEMENT NOTIFICATION
A.
SECTION 02080.221
The Contractor will make all necessary notifications to the appropriate federal, state and local agencies. All
required notifications will be made within 24 hours of the award of the contract. Copies of all notifications will
be forwarded to the Consultant at the same time the notifications are sent to the applicable government
agencies.
3.02 NESHAP NOTIFICATION
A.
SECTION 02080.204
The Contractor will have at all times in their possession at their office (one copy) and in view at the job site
(one copy) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) per OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR
1910.1200, on all equipment and/or materials present on the job or projected for use on the job site.
2.05 GENERAL
A.
SECTION 02080.202
SECTION 02080.222
The Contractor will comply with the requirements for notification as stated in the National Emission
Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), 40 CFR Part 6 1, Subpart M that requires if at least 80
linear meters (260 linear feet) of friable asbestos materials, or at least 15 square meters (160 square feet)
of friable asbestos materials, or 35 cubic feet of friable asbestos materials, or other facility components are
stripped or removed at a facility being renovated, every one of the requirements of section 61.147 apply.
This notification will be sent to the USEPA and the MDNR, and a copy will be forwarded to the Consultant.
This notification will include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Name and address of owner or operator.
2. Name, address, and license number of Contractor
3. Description of facility being demolished or renovated, including the size, age & prior use of facility.
4. Estimate of the approximate amount of friable asbestos material present in the facility in terms of linear
feet of pipe and surface area on other facility components.
5. Location of the facility being demolished or renovated.
6. Scheduled starting and completion dates of demolition or renovation.
7. Nature of planned demolition or renovation and method(s) to be used.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 7
8.
9.
Procedures to be used to comply with requirements.
Name and location of the waste disposal site where the friable asbestos waste material will be
deposited.
10. A certification that at least one person trained as required by paragraph (c) (8) of Subpart M, 40 CFR
Part 6 1, will supervise the stripping and removal described by the notification.
3.03 LARA NOTIFICATION
A.
SECTION 02080.223
The Contractor will comply with the requirements for notification as stated in the Michigan Occupational
Safety and Health Act, 1974 PA 154, as amended, section 58 f, that requires the Michigan LARA to be
notified prior to the occurrence of an asbestos abatement project.
3.04 WASTE MATERIAL NOTIFICATION
SECTION 02080.224
A.
The Contractor will provide satisfactory proof that any required waste transport permits were submitted in
addition to providing the name of the disposal site location and any arrangements for transport and disposal
of asbestos containing waste material. The Contractor will also need to submit any special handling
procedures employed and a list protective equipment utilized for asbestos disposal at the approved (to
receive asbestos) landfill, signed by the landfill owner. Additionally, under NESHAP, for any asbestos
containing waste material transported off of the facility site, the contractor shall maintain an asbestos waste
shipment record (WSR) including the following information:
1. The name, address and telephone number of the waste generator.
2. The name and address of the local, State, or EPA Regional agency responsible for administering the
asbestos NESHAP program.
3. The quantity of the asbestos-containing waste material in cubic meters (cubic yards).
4. The name and telephone number of the disposal site operator.
5. The date(s) of transport.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the waste transporter(s).
7. Notification that the contents of the consignment are fully and accurately described by proper shipping
name and are classified, packed, marked,
8. described by proper shipping name and are classified, packed, marked, labeled, and are in all respects
in proper condition for transport by highway according to applicable international and government
regulations.
B.
The WSR has three sections that must be completed by the waste generator, the waste transporter and the
disposal site owner or operator. A copy of the WSR must be provided to the owners or operators of the
disposal site at the same time as the asbestos-containing waste material is delivered to the disposal site.
The section completed by the disposal site includes spaces for noting discrepancies in material description,
amounts, and improperly enclosed or contained waste. The waste disposal site must send a copy of the
completed WSR to the generator (the facility owner) and to the company responsible for performing the
asbestos removal.
C.
If the waste generator does not receive a completed copy of the WSR within 35 days from the date that the
initial transporter accepted the waste, then the generator must contact the disposal site and/or the
transporter to determine the status of the consignment and request the completed form. If the completed
copy of the WSR is not received by the generator within 45 days from the date that the waste was accepted
by the transporter then the generator must report in writing to the local, State, or EPA Regional office
responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program and include in the report the following
information:
D.
A copy of the WSR for which a confirmation of delivery was not received.
E.
A cover letter signed by the waste generator explaining the efforts taken to locate the asbestos waste
shipment and the results of those efforts.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 8
Job #09270
F.
The waste generator is required to retain a copy of all waste shipment records, including those signed by
the owners or operators of waste disposal sites, for at least two years. The regulation also stipulates that
the generator furnish upon request, and make available for inspection, all records required under the
regulation.
3.05 TRAINING NOTIFICATION
A.
SECTION 02080.225
The Contractor will provide documentation that the Contractor's employees, including Field Superintendent,
Supervisors, or any other company personnel or agents, who have been exposed to airborne asbestos
fibers or who may be responsible for any asbestos abatement activities have received adequate training to
include but not limited to the use of respirators' contamination, origin of asbestos, etc., according to 29 CFR
Part 1926.58, 1926.1101, and Part 1910.134, and Michigan Public Acts No. 154 of 1974, as amended,
No.439 of 1988, and No. 440 of 1988. In addition, the contractor shall ensure and provide documentation
that at least one on-site representative, such as a Foreman or management-level person or other authorized
representative, trained in the provisions of the NESHAP regulations and the means of complying with them
will be present at the site during work shifts. The required training shall include as a minimum: applicability;
notifications; material identification; control procedures for removals including wetting, local exhaust
ventilation, negative pressure enclosures, glove-bag procedures, and High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA)
filters; waste disposal work practices; reporting and record keeping; and asbestos hazards and worker
protection. Evidence that the required training has been completed by at least one person at the site shall
be posted and made available for inspection at the demolition or renovation site.
3.06 MEDICAL CERTIFICATION
SECTION 02080.226
A.
The Contractor will provide documentation from a physician indicating that all Contractor's employees or
agents, who have been exposed to airborne asbestos in excess of the PEL, have been medically monitored
to determine whether they are physically capable of working while wearing the respirator required, without
suffering adverse health effects. In addition, documentation indicating the personnel have received medical
monitoring as required in OSHA 29 CFR 1926.58 (1), 1926.1 101,and 1910.134.
B.
The Contractor will provide proof that all abatement related employees have hadinstructions on the dangers
of asbestos exposure, on respirator use, decontamination, and all current and applicable regulations as
required under 29 CFR Part 1926.58, 1926.1101, and Michigan Acts No. 154 of 1974, as amended, No. 439
of 1988, No. 440 of 1988.
3.07 EQUIPMENT/STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES INFORMATION
A.
SECTION 02080.227
The Contractor standard operating procedures and equipment list which includes rental equipment, NIOSH
approvals for respiratory protective devices, documentation or respiratory fit testing and manufacture's
certificates that HEPA vacuums, air filtration devices, and any other exhaust ventilation equipment
conforming to ANSI Z 9-2-79, should be provided.
WORKER'S DRESS, SAFETY EQUIPMENT, RESPIRATORY PROTECTION, AND EMERGENCY PLANNING FOR
ASBESTOS REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.250
4.01 WORKER CLOTHING
SECTION 2080.251
A.
Work clothing shall consist of disposable full body coveralls, head covers, and boots. The Contractor shall
supply whatever safety gear is necessary to protect those people authorized to enter the work site,
including, if necessary, head and eye protection. Coveralls should be of disposable material (disposable
paper) and approved for protection against asbestos fibers.
B.
Street clothing can be worn under coveralls only during glovebag part of the removal. Workers may wear
multiple layers of disposable coveralls for warmth if needed.
4.02 RESPIRATORS
A.
SECTION 02080.252
Respiratory protection for workers shall be provided by the Contractor as required by current OSHA
regulations. PAPRs will be required for this particular site at all times during fireproofing material removal
and gross cleaning activities.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 9
B.
Respiratory protection consisting of NIOSH approved powered air purifying respirators (P.A.P.R.) with
full-face piece and HEPA filters will be provided to all asbestos abatement workers upon their request.
Negative pressure cartridge respirators may be used for setting up and tearing down enclosures, and
post-cleaning of the work area. Workers will always wear a respirator when in the work area. While wearing
the respirator, workers will not pull respirator away from their face to talk, smoke, eat, drink, or chew.
C.
The Contractor must provide sufficient quantity of filters approved for asbestos so that workers can change
filters as needed during the work day. Negative pressure cartridge filters shall not be used any longer than
one (1) work day. Powered air purifying respirator filters shall be flow checked twice daily and replaced when
the flow rate drops below the acceptable rate. New respirator filters shall be stored at the job site in the
change room and shall be totally protected from exposure to asbestos.
4.03 EMERGENCY PLANNING
SECTION 02080.253
A.
Emergency planning shall be developed prior to abatement initiation and agreed to by the Contractor and
the Consultant. The Contractor must provide a copy of emergency planning prior to start up.
B.
Emergency planning shall include considerations of fires, explosions, toxic atmospheres, electrical hazards,
slips, trips and falls, confined spaces and heat related injuries. Written procedures shall be provided.
Employees shall be trained in evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies. Emergency
procedures shall also be developed to cover the possibility of the collapse of an enclosure barrier or the
release of asbestos while outside of the work area.
1. For non-life threatening situations, employees injured or otherwise incapacitated shall decontaminate
following normal procedures with assistance from fellow
2. For life-threatening injury or illness, worker decontamination shall take least priority after measures to
stabilize the injured worker, remove him/her from the workplace and secure proper medical treatment.
PREPARATION OF WORK AREA FOR ASBESTOS REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.270
5.01 RESPONSIBILITY CHECKLISTS SECTION 02080.271
A.
Responsibility checklists will be used by the Supervisor, and/or Foreman. These checklists will ensure
projects run smoothly and safely.
5.02 DANGER SIGNS
A.
Signs will be posted at a distance sufficiently far enough away from asbestos abatement area to permit an
occupant to read the sign and take necessary protective measures to avoid exposure. Signs shall be in
accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. All possible entrances to the work area shall be
posted to include all critical enclosure barriers.
5.03 OWNER DUTIES
A.
SECTION 02080.272
SECTION 02080.273
As discussed previously, water supply, 110V electrical and drain utilities, within reason, will be provided by
Genesee County. Any electrical requirement other than typical 110V outlet power is the responsibility of the
Contractor. Genesee County will not provide waste dumpster, transport and burial location. The on-site
freight elevator is functional, and can be utilized.
5.04 HANDLING OF MOVEABLE OBJECTS
A.
Any easily moveable objects will be removed and stored in a location pre-determined by the Owner prior to
beginning any abatement activities. Any moveable objects left in the work area will first be pre-cleaned
using a HEPA vacuum and/or wet methods. After pre-cleaning, any non ACBM equipment/materials shall be
either left in place, or sealed with one layer of 6 mil visqueene.
5.05 HANDLING OF FIXED OBJECTS
A.
SECTION 02080.274
SECTION 02080.275
Any fixed objects in the work area will first be pre-cleaned using a HEPA vacuum and/or wet methods. After
pre-cleaning, any non ACBM fixed objects shall sealed with one layer of 6 mil visqueene.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 10
Job #09270
5.06 HANDLING OF WORK AREA SURFACES
A.
SECTION 02080.276
The Contractor shall pre-clean all scheduled surfaces in work area using HEPA filtered-vacuums and wet
cleaning methods, if necessary and as appropriate. No cleaning methods will be used that will raise dust,
such, as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. No
asbestos-containing materials shall be disturbed during pre-cleaning phases.
5.07 CRITICAL AREA SEALING
SECTION 02080.277
A.
The Contractor shall further seal all windows, ducts, grills, grates, and other openings between work area
and uncontaminated area with two layers of 6-mil plastic sheeting.
B.
All fan units shall be effectively sealed prior to commencement of abatement.
5.08 SEALING OF FLOORS
A.
Where necessary, floors shall be sealed with at least two layers of 6 mil poly, installed so that seams
overlap. Each layer shall extend at least 6” up side walls, with walls overlapping the floor layers. All seams
shall be sealed with spray glue and duct tape. One additional 6 mil layer shall be added as a drop cloth
covering the two permanent poly floor layers.
5.09 SEALING OF WALLS
A.
SECTION 02080.280
Procedures developed for evacuation of injured workers will be used. Aid for a seriously injured worker will
not be delayed for reasons of decontamination.
5.11 WORK AREA REMOVAL
A.
SECTION 02080.279
All walls shall be covered with at least one layer of 6 mil poly. All free standing enclosure walls shall be
constructed of at least two layers of 6 mil poly. Plastic shall be sized to minimize seams. Seams on
successive layers shall be staggered. Al least one layer of the wall sheeting shall overlap, and be attached
to, the floor poly sheeting. All punctures and leaks shall be immediately repaired.
5.10 WORKER INJURY
A.
SECTION 02080.278
SECTION 02080.281
No asbestos abatement shall begin until the Consultant has inspected the work areas and given approval for
work to begin.
DECONTAMINATION
SECTION 02080.300
A.
SECTION 02080.301
The Contractor will construct decontamination facilities in pre-designated areas which will house the clean
room, shower room, dirty room, and when feasible, an equipment room. This facility will be a
three-chambered entrance air lock with shower facilities in its central chamber. The dimensions of these
chambers will be adequate for the number of men needed for the project. At least four layers of 6-mil plastic
will be placed on the floor of the entire decontamination, chamber, to prevent leakage of water from the
showers. The walls, floor, and ceiling covering of the air lock construction will be seamed to each other in a
fashion making them airtight. One end of this construction will be placed inside or at the containment barrier
walls. Each of the three chambers in the air lock will have a door at either end. This means there will be a
total of at least four doors. Except for these doors, all three chambers will be partitioned from each other
with air and watertight walls made of plastic sheeting. Both layers will be attached to the side of the door
which faces toward the work area. The first layer of plastic sheeting will be attached at the top, bottom, and
sides of the door opening. It will be slit down the middle. The second layer of plastic sheeting will be
attached only at the top of the door. It will be wider than the door opening and will hang like a flap. When air
is drawn from the clean side of the air lock to the work area side, it will cause the door flaps to lift. If air
attempts to move from the work area end of the air lock toward the clean end, it forces the flaps shut,
stopping the air flow. The central chamber will contain a shower(s). Each shower stall will sit in a pan with at
least six-inch sides. Suitable hoses will be used to supply hot and cold water to the shower.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 11
B.
Wastewater shall be filtered. If water is scheduled to exit the work area without being filtered, it will be
treated as asbestos waste.
6.02 Entering the Work Area
A.
Section 02080.302
The Contractor shall ensure that all workers, without exception, will change street clothes at designated
areas (clean room) prior to start of the day's work. After workers are properly dressed in protective gear,
they will walk through the shower and dirty room into the work area.
6.03 EXITING THE WORK AREA
A.
SECTION 02080.303
At the end of the work shift, and any time workers leave the work area, they will decontaminate by removing
all contaminated work clothes in the dirty room except for their respirators. They will then proceed to the
showers and properly wash. Respirators will be worn while showering and remain on until the respirator is
clean of asbestos. The cartridges will then be removed and disposed of as asbestos waste and the
respirator stored in the clean room. Workers will shower before lunch and at the end of each day's work. Hot
water, towels, soap, and hygienic conditions are the responsibility of the Contractor.
6.04 RESTRICTIONS
SECTION 02080.304
A.
No smoking, eating, drinking or chewing (gum or tobacco) is to take place in the
B.
enclosure. Prior to exiting the work area to smoke, eat, drink or use the toilet facilities, workers will fully
decontaminate by showering, and then exit the work area. Each worker will then change into a new clean
disposable coverall to eat, smoke, or drink. This new coverall can then be used to re-enter the work area.
C.
Worker's footwear will remain inside the work area until completion of the job. All footwear utilized in the
work area will be thoroughly cleaned at the end of the project and sealed in an air-tight container prior to
leaving the work area.
EQUIPMENT MATERIAL DEBRIS BAG OUT
SECTION 02080.310
7.01 BAG-OUT FACILITY CONSTRUCTION AND USAGE
A.
SECTION 02080.311
The Contractor, whenever possible, will construct a two chambered air lock to serve as a bag out port. The
chambers will be constructed in the same manner as the main decontamination air lock, but excluding the
shower facility. However, each waste container must still be cleaned prior to exiting the enclosure.
7.02 WASTE STORAGE
SECTION 02080.312
A.
All asbestos waste will be containerized within 12 mils (minimum) of poly (doubled disposal bags), or within
sealable drums. All containerized waste must be sufficiently sealed to be leak proof and airtight. All waste
containers must be properly labeled. Labels shall be of sufficient size and contrast to be readily visible and
legible. The labels shall state:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER & LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
B.
Additionally, each waste container shall be clearly marked with the facility name and address.
C.
Waste containers can only be stored on location in a lockable, sealable dumpster. The Contractor is
responsible for all dumpster arrangements. The dumpster interior must be lined with at least one layer of 6
mil poly. The dumpster must be clearly marked on all sides with asbestos warning signs, displayed in such
a manner that a person can easily read the legend, during the loading and unloading of the waste material.
The signs shall display the following legend with letter sizes and styles of visibility at least equal to those
specified below:
DANGER
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS & PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 12
Job #09270
D.
Letter Sizes and Fonts: One (1) inch high in Sarif, Gothic or Block Fonts.
E.
No waste will be stored at the site, inside the building confines. All waste must be containerized and moved
to the dumpster at the end of each work day. The dumpster will be sealed and locked at the end of each
work day.
7.03 WASTE DISPOSAL
Section 02080.313
A.
The Contractor shall submit copies of all transport manifests, trip tickets and disposal receipts for all
asbestos waste materials removed from the work area during the abatement process to the Owner. The
contractor shall maintain and complete the required Waste Shipment Record as outlined in Section
02080.224.
B.
The transport vehicle must be clearly marked on all sides with “Other Regulated Material” (ORM) warning
signs, displayed in such a manner that a person can easily read the legend, during the loading and
unloading of the waste material.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PROCEDURES
SECTION 02080.330
8.01 ESTABLISHMENT OF A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ENVIRONMENT
A.
SECTION 02080.331
Any material removal specified to be performed inside a negative pressure enclosure will be completed with
the use of full containment logistics and air filtration devices. Each unit must have three (3) filters, including
two pre filter stages, and a HEPA filter. Air filtration devices will be set up so that the air is drawn away from
the worker doing abatement. All air filtration devices shall be designed and operated in accordance with 40
CFR 61, Subpart M, Section 61.154, and OSHA 1926.58 Appendix F, in addition to 1926.1101. All air
filtration devices will run continuously once abatement has begun, and until an air sampling for clearance
and reoccupation has been conducted in accordance with this specification. An adequate number of air
filtration devices will be used in order to maintain a continuous pressure differential in all parts of the work
area of -.02 inches of water as compared to the outside of the work area. Verification of this required level
will be constantly monitored on each and every full containment.
8.02 MAINTAINING A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 02080.332
A.
The Contractor shall insure that proper air filtration is maintained in all areas where abatement will be
conducted utilizing full containment. The use of negative pressure differential monitors (manometer) by the
Contractor, at their expense, for each full enclosure is mandated.
B.
The Consultant will perform daily enclosure inspections and reading of the Contractor's NP instrument to
verify the presence of a differential pressure air environment. If the results are not satisfactory, it is the
Contractor's responsibility to correct the deficient differential pressure air environment before proceeding
with further work.
8.03 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE EXHAUST
A.
The Contractor must have the air filtration devices used during the project exhausted to the outside of the
building at all times.
WORK SITE SECURITY
SECTION 02080.350
9.01 AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
A.
SECTION 02080.333
SECTION 02080.351
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the security of the work area. The work area is restricted to
authorized, trained, and protected personnel only. These may include the Contractor's employees,
employees of Subcontractors, Consultant's employees, Owner's employees and representatives, inspectors
and any other designated individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to job start
and posted in the clean room of the worker decontamination facility. The Contractor will also maintain a list
of all persons, other than their work, who have entered the work area, and the date and time of entrance and
exit.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 13
9.02 UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
A.
SECTION 02080.352
Entry into the work area by unauthorized individuals shall be reported immediately to the Consultant and the
Contractor.
9.03 WORK AREA ACCESS
SECTION 02080.353
A.
Access to any enclosure work areas shall be through a single worker decontamination system. The only
exceptions for this rule are the waste pass-out airlock which shall be sealed except during the removal of
containerized asbestos waste from the work area, and emergency exits in case of fire or accident.
Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside; however, they shall be sealed with plastic sheeting
and tape until needed.
B.
Access to work areas not under full enclosure conditions shall be restricted in such a manner as to
eliminate the entrance of unauthorized personnel. This shall be done by using the required barrier tape,
danger signs and erecting poly sheeting to act as a deterrent wall. Black colored poly will be used in these
instances.
METHODS OF ASBESTOS REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.370
10.01
SECTION 02080.371
A.
10.02
A.
10.03
A.
10.04
A.
ASBESTOS MATERIAL(S) WETTING
The asbestos material will be sprayed with either "amended water" which contains an additive to enhance
penetration, or a removal encapsulant, providing that the Contractor can demonstrate that the removal
encapsulant dust control properties are superior to those of amended water. A fine spray of this solution will
be applied to prevent fiber disturbance preceding the removal of the asbestos material. The asbestos will be
sufficiently saturated to prevent emission of airborne fibers in excess of the exposure limits prescribed in
the federal, state and local standards. Surrounding areas will be periodically sprayed and kept wet to
facilitate removal with minimum fiber release. A high humidity will be maintained in the work area to assist
in fiber settling.
FLOOR TILE REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.372
Floor tile removal shall be performed under full enclosure conditions. Tiles will be wetted before, during and
after removal with amended water. Removed VAT will be placed into poly lined fiber drums for disposal.
Each drum, when filled, will be sealed, labeled, cleaned and passed out of the work area for disposal as
RACM.
PIPING INSULATION MATERIAL REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.374
Mud fitting/hanger removal will be performed under full enclosure conditions. Sufficient fiberglass will be
removed on either side of the mud to ensure no mud residue remains on the pipe. The Owner's
Representative will perform a fitting/hanger count prior to this material removal, and the contractor's
competent person on site will verify the count for unit price billing purposes.
CEILING MATERIAL REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.375
ACM spray on fireproofing material removal will be performed under full enclosure conditions.
1. Removal will be done in small sections with two person teams, on staging platforms or scaffold, if
needed. Experimentation to determine the most efficient method of gross material removal will need to
take place.
2. No undue amounts of debris will be allowed to accumulate inside enclosure work areas. Debris must
be cleaned up as removal progresses in order to minimize contamination spread, keep fiber
concentrations at a minimum and expedite final cleaning. Work will be halted at any time if gross
material clean up is not to the Consultants satisfaction.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 14
Job #09270
10.05
A.
10.06
A.
WASTEWATER REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.376
Water used in work areas, and the decontamination shower water shall be transported in sealed bags and
drums for disposal, or may be filtered to the requirements of all applicable governmental regulations for
discharge into the sanitary and/or storm sewer. The filtration device will be inspected daily while in use by
the Consultant.
WASTE MATERIAL REMOVAL
SECTION 02080.377
The waste material will be packed into labeled 6-mil plastic bags (held within drums where appropriate).
Double bagging will always be used. Bags shall not be overfilled and will be securely taped or sealed at the
top to prevent accidental opening or leakage during removal from the enclosure, storage and/or transport.
Large components removed intact will be wrapped in 2 layers of 6-mil plastic, water tight sheeting secured
with tape and labeled for transport to the landfill, as per Division 2, Section 02080.312.
GLOVEBAG REM0VAL
SECTION 02080.390
11.01
SECTION 02080.391
GLOVEBAG USAGE
A.
Glove bag removal of pipe insulation is not anticipated for this project. However, whenever glovebag
removal is employed, the following procedures will be used:
1. An individual glovebag removal may be performed by one person. Two persons are required to perform
any glovebag removal project involving removal of more than one glovebag.
2. All glove bagging will be conducted in work areas that are in compliance with 29 CFR Part 1926.1101,
Appendix F. Any use of any glovebag must be approved by the Consultant prior to use.
3. Removal with a glovebag will never be done on pipe in excess of 150° Fahrenheit.
B.
Area Isolation and Set Up:
1. Remove unauthorized personnel or personnel not required for job performance from the work area.
2. Close and lock all access points into the work area.
3. Erect red “Caution: Asbestos” barrier tape around the work zone at a nominal distance of 20 feet from
the work location.
4. Remove all moveable objects from the work area to outside the barrier tape zone.
5. Place “Danger Asbestos Hazard: Respirators and Protective Clothing Required” signs at the immediate
work zone.
6. Place a 6 mil minimum thickness poly drop cloth beneath the work zone. The drop cloth must be large
enough to encompass the entire area that could be potentially affected by any remediation activity
fallout. The drop cloth must cover any materials, furniture, or equipment in the work area, as well as
the floor beneath the work area.
C.
Worker Protection Procedures:
1. All glovebag personnel shall wear respiratory protection and a disposable protective suit.
2. Street clothes are not allowed beneath the disposable suit.
3. Disposable shorts or a bathing suit may be worn beneath the disposable suit.
4. Another option is that a set of work clothes only for use during asbestos operations may be worn
beneath the disposable suit. These clothes must be placed into an airtight, sealed container prior to
leaving the work zone.
5. The container can only be opened and the clothes put on and removed only inside the work zone.
6. An inspection of the material to be removed will be made. If the insulation is damaged, use a HEPA
vacuum to clean any loose material from the damage location prior to attempting glovebag installation.
D.
Glovebag Removal Instructions:
1. Place the required tools into the pouch inside the glovebag.
2. For installation on piping, place the glovebag around the pipe, fitting or area of material to be removed,
seal the seams with staples then duct tape, and seal the bag ends to the pipe with duct tape.
3. For installation to a roof deck or wall surface, coat both the roof deck or wall surface where the
glovebag is to be attached and the edge seams of the glovebag to be attached with a layer of spray
glue. Let the glue become tacky, then join the glue faces to each other. Spray another layer of glue
over the attachment area, and then seal the exposed glue/seam with multiple layers of duct tape.
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 15
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
E.
A solution of amended water (water with a surfactant wetting agent added) shall be used in an airless
sprayer.
Insert the wand of the sprayer through a small slit cut near the top of the bag and seal the wand slit
with duct tape around the wand.
Insert the HEPA vacuum hose nozzle into another small slit cut near the top of the bag, or into the
prefabricated hose port and tape that plastic around the hose nozzle.
Soak the asbestos with amended water. The material must be continuously wetted.
Cut through the asbestos at each end. For mud fitting insulation removal from fiberglass runs, removed
up to 6” of fiberglass on either side of the fitting mud to ensure no residual ACM mud remains.
Slit along the top of the section to be removed.
Lift the insulation off the pipe and carefully lower it into the bottom of the glovebag.
Clean remaining residue from the pipe with amended water, brushes, rags, etc.
Rinse the tools with water inside the bag, and then remove them by pulling the tools back through one
of the gloves, twisting the glove shut and taping it. The glove is then cut from the bag through the tape
section and placed into the next bag for re-use.
Any exposed asbestos ends will then be sealed using either wettable lag cloth, a bridging encapsulant
or lag cloth sealed by the bridging encapsulant.
Remove the water wand, and seal the opening.
Turn on the vacuum and evacuate all the air from the bag.
Twist the bottom section of the glovebag containing the waste, and seal it with duct tape above the
twist.
Remove the HEPA vacuum nozzle.
Carefully cut the glovebag down from the pipe, folding the open sections in on themselves as the bag
is removed.
Place the removed glovebag into an awaiting 6 mil disposal bag, and seal the disposal bag.
Area Clean Up Instructions
1. HEPA vacuum and/or wet wipe any visible debris that has accumulated on the drop cloth or any other
surfaces in the work area.
2. Wet wipe any tools and equipment to be saved and re-used. Move the tools and equipment from the
work area.
3. HEPA vacuum off any visible debris on your protective suit. Remove the protective suit, rolling it in on
itself, and dispose of into an asbestos labeled disposal bag.
4. Dispose of all cloths, rags and towels used for cleaning as asbestos contaminated into an asbestos
labeled disposal bag.
5. Roll up the drop cloth, folding it in on itself so that any residual debris is folded up inside the drop
cloth. Dispose of the drop cloth into an asbestos labeled disposal bag.
6. Take down the “Danger Asbestos” signs) and the barrier tape. Dispose of into an asbestos labeled
disposal bag.
POST-ABATEMENT CLEAN UP
SECTION 02080.400
12.01
SECTION 02080.401
A.
12.02
A.
WORK SURFACE CLEANING
After completion of all stripping work, surfaces from which asbestos-containing materials have been
removed will be brushed or wiped clean to remove all visible residue. An encapsulant will be used to seal
the surface which will dry.
WORK AREA CLEANING
SECTION 02080.402
All visible accumulations of asbestos-containing material and contaminated debris will be removed and
containerized utilizing rubber dust pans and rubber squeegees to collect material. Cleaning operations shall
be performed on a continuous basis. Accumulation of any debris within the enclosure is not allowed. All
gross debris shall be containerized as it is created.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 16
Job #09270
12.03
ENCLOSURE REMOVAL AND CLEANING
SECTION 02080.403
A.
Following the initial cleaning, interior plastic sheeting, other than the first layer, will be removed other than
critical barriers to doors, windows, and other openings to areas outside of the work area will be left in place
until the final air clearance tests are completed.
B.
All removed plastic sheeting material and tape, and all cleaning material, and contaminated clothing will be
placed in 6-mil plastic bags or plastic-lined drums, sealed and labeled as described in Division 2, Section
02080.312 above for disposal as asbestos waste material.
C.
The Consultant will visually inspect the work area for visible residue. If any accumulation of the residue is
observed, it will be assumed to be asbestos and the cleaning will be repeated.
12.04
A.
TOOL/EQUIPMENT CLEANING
SECTION 02080.404
All tools will be decontaminated by removing any gross amount of asbestos from them in the work
(abatement) area. Following this, they will be wiped off in the dirty room and then sprayed down with water
in the shower area. All hand tools will then be sealed in plastic bags. Workers will wear protective
equipment throughout this process. This will eliminate the accumulation of gross asbestos on tools and
equipment and will facilitate decontamination of these items.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR AREA CLEAN UP
13.01
A.
13.02
A.
13.03
A.
AREA CLEANING
A.
SECTION 02080.421
The contractor will have cleaned all work site surfaces in a proper manner with appropriate equipment (i.e.,
HEPA filter-equipped equipment and wet methods).
1. After completion of the cleaning operation, the Consultant will perform a complete visual inspection of
the work area to verify that the work area is dust free. The Consultant will perform a PCM post
abatement air sampling for clearance once the work area has passed a visual inspection.
2. Work areas will be considered clean when the requirements stated in 40 CFR Part 763.90 have been
achieved.
POST-ABATEMENT AIR MONITORING
SECTION 02080.422
Air samples will be collected inside full negative pressure enclosures immediately after completion of all
cleaning operations as specified in Division 2, Sections 02080.401 - 02080.404 of these specifications. Post
abatement air monitoring requirements for work performed outside of full enclosures (e.g. - glovebag
removal, HEPA vacuum debris cleaning) will be determined after on site analysis by the Consultant of the
air samples collected during the specific work operation. Post abatement air monitoring will be performed in
all work areas where work area sample results exceed a concentration of .05 f/cc and/or personal exposure
level sampling exhibits a concentration of 0.1 f/cc or greater.
FINAL ABATEMENT DUTIES
SECTION 02080.423
Once the work area is found to be in compliance and all entrances and exits shall be unsealed only when
the entire component is abated. The plastic sheeting, tape, debris, and other trash will be disposed of
within two watertight plastic bags (6 mil thick minimum/each) and treated as contaminated material and
buried in the approved class two waste disposal landfill.
CLEAN UP AND GUARANTEE
14.01
SECTION 02080.420
FINAL INSPECTION
SECTION 02080.440
SECTION 02080.441
After completion of the cleaning operations, the following should be performed:
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 17
1.
A complete visual inspection to ensure dust free conditions. The Contractor shall view and inspect the
entire work area, including, but not limited to: doorways, windows, and other openings; he/she shall
look for debris from any sources, residue on surfaces, or any other matter which could be
asbestos-containing. If any debris, residue or other suspected asbestos is found, repeat the final
cleaning until the visual inspection is passed. The Contractor will then complete the attached
Certificate of Visual Inspection. It shall be the right of the Consultant to be present during the
inspection. The contractor shall submit the certificate prior to payment. This inspection shall then be
duplicated by the Consultant prior to the beginning of any air monitoring for postabatement clearance
and area reoccupation.
AIR MONITORING
15.01
A.
15.02
A.
15.03
A.
15.04
A.
SECTION 02080.500
PERFORMANCE
SECTION 02080.501
Genesee County has retained the services of Sierra Technical Services, to act as the consultant for the
Project Management, collection and analysis of air monitoring samples throughout the remediation required
by all applicable government regulations, and to act on the behalf of Genesee County during the entire
abatement project.
EXECUTION
SECTION 02080.502
During the entire removal and cleaning operation, (per current OSHA, EPA, State, Local Regulations, etc.)
daily air sample monitoring will be conducted by experienced technicians of the Consultant to ensure that
the Contractor is complying with all codes, regulations, specifications, and ordinances. It must be noted
that high concentrations of fibers in the contiguous zones will require work stoppage until the problem can
be corrected. The methods that will be used are the most current OSHA Standards (29 CFR Part 1926.58.
and 1926.1101) and USEPA guidelines.
SAMPLE COLLECTION
SECTION 02080.503
The number of samples taken will be dependent on the size of the job. Listed below are typical samples
which may be collected at an abatement project:
1. Baseline: Collected before any abatement is started to establish the airborne fiber concentrations
within the building. These are sometimes used to determine how well a Contractor has cleaned the
buildings, by comparing the baseline samples with the postabatement samples.
2. Background: Collected away from the work area to establish normal fiber levels, and to be collected
simultaneously with each sample set.
3. Contiguous: Collected just outside of the work area to ensure that areas of the building beyond the
work area are not contaminated by airborne asbestos or asbestos-containing dust released by any
phase of the abatement work. A contiguous sample will be collected at each location that may be
likely to have an air leak including entrances to the work area, critical barriers and AFD exhausts.
Samples will be collected daily.
4. Worker Personal: Collected inside the work area to ensure that the workers performing the asbestos
abatement project are not exposed to contamination levels which exceed their respiratory protection or
otherwise endanger their health. The samples will be collected from the breathing zones of worker
performing the abatement.
5. Work Area: Collected inside the work area to assess the contamination levels created by the work
being performed. These samples will be collected during abatement activities in work areas where full
enclosure conditions are not employed.
6. Post Abatement: Taken after the project is completed and the work area has been cleaned.
Postabatement samples determine if the job has been done correctly and whether the cleanup process
must be repeated.
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
SECTION 02080.504
All samples shall be analyzed using the NIOSH 7400 Method (revised), the NIOSH 7402 Method, the OSHA
Reference Method from 29 CFR Part 1926.58, 1926.1101, Appendix A, or the EPA Interim Level Two
method as stated in 40 CFR Subpart E, Appendix A. All air sampling and analysis will meet the
requirements as stated in 40 CFR Subpart E.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 18
Job #09270
15.05
A.
15.06
A.
POST-ABATEMENT SAMPLING TECHNIQUES
SECTION 02080.505
All Post Abatement levels will be .05 f/cc, or less.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
SECTION 02080.506
The Contractor will be responsible for any special air monitoring requirements that will not be provided by
the Consultant. The cost of any special air monitoring requirements, if performed by the Consultant will be
set by the Owner, and deducted from the contractor's payment. The Building owner reserves the right to
refuse to conduct any special air monitoring not required by this document.
DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS MATERIAL AND RELATED DEBRIS
16.01
A.
16.02
MATERIAL STORAGE AND LOADING PROCEDURES
SECTION 02080.550
SECTION 02080.551
All asbestos-contaning materials and miscellaneous debris will be double bagged and labelled with a waste
generator/location label prior to leaving the work area. No waste storage, other than within a secured
dumpster, will be allowed on site.
LOADING AND UNLOADING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 02080.552
A.
Equipment operators and workers who load and unload the sealed drums or double bags will wear
respirators and disposable coveralls when handling the asbestos-containing material at the work site and the
disposal site.
B.
During loading and unloading procedures, the vehicle (truck) and/or dumpster will be identified with barrier
tape and appropriate warning signs and specified in Section 02080.311.
16.03
A.
MATERIAL UNLOADING PROCEDURES
SECTION 02080.553
If double bagging is the storage technique used, the bags may be dumped directly into the pre-approved
burial site. Care will be taken to avoid puncturing or breaking the bags. Any bags that are punctured or
broken during unloading or dumping will be re-bagged and re-labelled prior to final burial.
SUBMITTAL PRIOR TO CONTRACTOR RELEASE / FINAL PAYMENT
17.01
A.
17.02
A.
17.03
A.
DAMAGES
SECTION 02080.600
SECTION 02080.601
The Contractor shall promptly repair all unwarranted damages to the facility at no cost to the Building
Owner, unless such damages are authorized, in writing, by the Consultant. The Contractor will be requied
to perform the actual asbestos removal over a period not exceeding the time frame agreed upon by Owner,
and Consultant, unless agreed upon by all parties in writing.
SUBMITTALS
SECTION 02080.602
The Contractor must submit the following prior to final payment request:
1. Proof of final disposition of the asbestos material (manifests, WSR, etc.) including any disposal
receipts and trip tickets
2. Contractor's Daily Log and notes
3. The Contractor's daily restricted space work area entry sign in forms
4. Copies of training certificates and accreditation information for any Contractor employee listed on the
daily restricted space work area sign in sheets
5. Any Authorization for Re-occupancy forms, signed original copies of any Certificates of Visual
Inspection, or air monitoring results for which the Contractor is responsible
6. A report stating the quantities of asbestos removed.
7. The Waste Shipment Record must be completed and returned to the Building Owner as outlined in
Section 02080.224
8. Copies of all original and revised notifications.
APPROVAL
SECTION 02080.603
All work, at any time, is subject to inspection and approval by representatives of the Regulatory Agencies,
Consultant, and/or Owner. The Consultant will observe removal and inspect waste bags for NESHAP
Job #09270
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 19
compliance. The contractor will accept all liability for noncompliance to all regulations, including NESHAP.
All work must be completed according to EPA, OSHA, and MIOSHA standards and regulations, and to the
satisfaction of MLARA, MDNRE, and any other applicable enforcement agencies.
END OF SECTION
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 82 06 - Page 20
Job #09270
SECTION 02 82 07
CERTIFICATION OF POST-ABATEMENT VISUAL INSPECTION
PROJECT NAME: ____________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT NO: _________________________________________
BUILDING/FACILITY NAME: ___________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS: __________________________________________________________________________________
CITY, STATE, ZIP: ____________________________________________________________________________
In accordance with Section 02080.400 of the Asbestor Abatement Specifications outlined in Section 02
82 06, the Contractor hereby acknowledges that the Foreman or Certified Person has visually
inspected all work areas as stated in the Scope of Work in the contract, and has found no visible dust,
debris, or other residue remaining. The on-site Certified Person will acknowledge and sign the
following, which will be provided on the Contractor's Stationery, with Letterhead and address:
The Corporate Seal of
____________________________________________
(Bidder - print the full name of your firm)
__________________
Date
was hereunto affixed in the presence of:
____________________________________________
______________________________________
____________________________________________
(Print Name)
______________________________________
(Print Name)
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
CERTIFICATION OF POST-ABATEMENT VISUAL INSPECTION
02 82 07 - Page 1
SECTION 03 01 00
MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Repair of exposed structural, shrinkage, and settlement cracks.
B.
Resurfacing of concrete surfaces having spalled areas and other damage.
C.
Repair of deteriorated concrete.
A.
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011.
B.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.
C.
ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.
D.
ASTM C928/C928M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening Cementitious Material for
Concrete Repairs; 2009.
E.
ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete;
1999 (Reapproved 2008).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Certificate of Compliance: Submit completed Certificate of Compliance from Section 01 33 02 for all
products/components included in this Section.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with
not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with minimum of
3 years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions for storage, shelf life limitations, and handling of products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENTITIOUS PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
2. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com.
3. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com.
4. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchemllc.com.
5. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
6. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
B.
Bonding Slurry: Water-based latex admixture complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, combined with
Portland cement and sand in accordance with admixture manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Cementitious Resurfacing Mortar: One- or two-component, factory-mixed, polymer-modified cementitious
mortar designed for continuous thin-coat application; dry material complying with ASTM C928/C928M;
in-place material capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions.
Job #09270
03 01 00 - Page 1
1.
2.
Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer.
Color: Light gray.
D.
Cementitious Repair Mortar, Trowel Grade: One- or two-component, factory-mixed, polymer-modified
cementitious mortar; dry material complying with ASTM C928/C928M; in-place material capable of
withstanding freeze/thaw conditions.
1. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M.
E.
Cementitious Repair Mortar, Form and Pour/Pump Grade: Flowable, one- or two-component, factory-mixed,
polymer-modified cementitious mortar; dry material complying with ASTM C928/C928M; in-place material
capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions.
1. Mixed with water in proportions as recommended by manufacturer.
2.02 EPOXY PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com.
2. Chase Construction Products: www.e-poxy.com.
3. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchemllc.com.
4. STO Corp: www.stocorp.com.
5. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
B.
Epoxy Repair Mortar: Epoxy resin mixed with aggregate and other materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended; conform to pot life and workability limits.
C.
Epoxy Injection Adhesive:
2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, grey.
B.
Sand: ASTM C33 or ASTM C404; uniformly graded, clean.
C.
Water: Clean and potable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02 CRACK REPAIR USING EPOXY ADHESIVE INJECTION
A.
Repair exposed cracks.
B.
Provide temporary entry ports spaced to accomplish movement of fluids between ports; no deeper than the
depth of the crack to be filled or port size diameter no greater than the thickness of the crack. Provide
temporary seal at concrete surface to prevent leakage of adhesive.
C.
Inject adhesive into ports under pressure using equipment appropriate for particular application.
D.
Begin injection at lower entry port and continue until adhesive appears in adjacent entry port. Continue from
port to port until entire crack is filled.
E.
Remove temporary seal and excess adhesive.
F.
Clean surfaces adjacent to repair and blend finish.
03 01 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.03 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR USING CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
A.
Clean concrete surfaces, cracks, and joints of dirt, laitance, corrosion, and other contamination using
method(s) specified above and allow to dry.
B.
Apply coating of bonding agent to entire concrete surface to be repaired.
C.
Fill voids with cementitious mortar flush with surface.
D.
Apply repair mortar by steel trowel to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch over entire surface, terminating at a
vertical change in plane on all sides.
E.
Trowel finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
03 01 00 - Page 3
SECTION 04 01 01
MASONRY TUCK POINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
New rough openings in existing masonry.
B.
Toothing of existing masonry.
C.
Tuck pointing of existing masonry.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes; 2003.
B.
ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile; 2007.
C.
ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005.
D.
ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004.
E.
ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007.
F.
ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006.
G.
ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale);
2007.
H.
ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete
Institute International; 2005.
I.
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
J.
IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction;
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; 1993.
K.
IMIAWC (HW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction;
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; current edition.
L.
ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a.
M. ASTM C 387/C 387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and
Concrete; 2006a.
N.
ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.
O.
ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2007.
P.
ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain
and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2007a.
Q.
ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2005.
R.
ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2008.
S.
ASTM C 1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength; 2006.
T.
ASTM C 1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry; 1995 (Reapproved 2007).
U.
ASTM C 1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2007.
Job #09270
04 01 01 - Page 1
V.
ASTM E 518 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry; 2003.
A.
Masonry Contractor: Company specializing in masonry and restoration of existing masonry with minimum
three years of documented experience.
B.
Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where
exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
A.
Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or
applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated
on the drawings for specific locations.
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
3. Load-Bearing and Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
2.02 MORTAR MIX DESIGNS: ASTM C270, Property Specification.
A.
Interior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
B.
Interior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type O.
2.03 TUCK POINTING MORTAR
A.
Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime, and two parts graded
(80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium
stearate equal to 2 percent of portland cement by weight.
2.04 MORTAR MIXING
A.
Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in
quantities needed for immediate use.
B.
Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
C.
If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
2.05 GROUT MIXES
A.
Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in
accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less.
2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.
2.06 GROUT MIXING
A.
Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
B.
Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 476
for fine and coarse grout.
04 01 01 - Page 2
Job #09270
C.
Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D.
Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CUT OUT OF EXISTING MORTAR JOINTS
A.
Cut out existing mortar joints (both bed and head joints) and remove by means of a toothing chisel or a
special pointer's grinder, to a uniform depth of to 19 mm (3/4-inch), or until sound mortar is reached. Take
care to not damage edges of existing masonry units to remain.
B.
Remove dust and debris from the joints by brushing, blowing with air or rinsing with water. Do not rinse when
temperature is below freezing.
3.02 REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OF EXISTING STONE VENEER
A.
Carefully sawcut and remove all existing stone veneer from masonry walls scheduled for demolition.
B.
Clean removed stone veneer panels of all adhered mortar and store for reuse as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TUCK POINTING MORTAR
A.
Immediately prior to application of mortar, dampen joints to be tuck pointed. Prior to application of pointing
mortar, allow masonry units to absorb surface water.
B.
Tightly pack mortar into joints in thin layers, approximately 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick maximum.
C.
Allow layer to become "thumbprint hard" before applying next layer.
D.
Pack final layer flush with surfaces of masonry units. When mortar becomes "thumbprint hard", tool joints.
3.04 TOOLING OF JOINTS
A.
Tool joints with a jointing tool to produce a smooth, compacted, concaved joint.
B.
Tool joints in patch work with a jointing tool to match the existing surrounding joints. //
3.05 REPLACEMENT OF MASONRY UNITS
A.
Cut
1.
2.
3.
out mortar joints surrounding masonry units that are to be removed and replaced.
Units removed may be broken and removed, providing surrounding units to remain are not damaged.
Once the units are removed, carefully chisel out the old mortar and remove dust and debris.
If units are located in exterior wythe of a cavity or veneer wall, exercise care to prevent debris falling
into cavity.
B.
Dampen surfaces of the surrounding units before new units are placed.
1. Allow existing masonry to absorb surface moisture prior to starting installation of the new replacement
units.
2. Butter contact surfaces of existing masonry and new replacement masonry units with mortar.
3. Center replacement masonry units in opening and press into position.
4. Remove excess mortar with a trowel.
5. Point around replacement masonry units to ensure full head and bed joints.
6. When mortar becomes "thumbprint hard", tool joints.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed masonry surfaces on completion.
B.
Remove mortar droppings and other foreign substances from wall surfaces.
C.
First wet surfaces with clean water, then wash down with a solution of soapless detergent specially
prepared for cleaning brick.
D.
Brush with stiff fiber brushes while washing, and immediately thereafter hose down with clean water.
Job #09270
04 01 01 - Page 3
E.
Free clean surfaces from traces of detergent, foreign streaks or stains. Protect materials during cleaning
operations including adjoining construction.
F.
Use of muratic acid for cleaning is prohibited.
END OF SECTION
04 01 01 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Shop fabricated steel items.
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
B.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007).
C.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength; 2009a.
D.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength
(Metric); 2009.
E.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding
Society; 2007.
F.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
G.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Plates: ASTM A283.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, plain.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
D.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush,
and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
Job #09270
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - Page 1
E.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of
same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.
2.04 FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Prime paint all steel items.
B.
Prime Painting: One coat.
2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or
embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of
erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Field weld components indicated.
D.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Fire retardant treated wood materials.
B.
Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
C.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
A.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
A.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b.
C.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection
Association; 2010.
D.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
E.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department
of Commerce); 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation
and to allow air circulation.
B.
Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is
specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American
Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and
grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
Job #09270
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - Page 1
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Interior Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I.
B.
Communications and Electrical Equipment Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density
fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and
preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood
treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance
with specified requirements.
B.
Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low
hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum
flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant
combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15
percent for plywood.
b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after
installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty
items, and trim.
B.
Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Wall-mounted door stops.
4. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Interior Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing
and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
B.
Communications and Electrical Equipment Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs (anchors to
masonry walls) with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 12 inches on center on all edges
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
and into studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to
studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Waste Disposal: Comply with the General Requirements.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or
“waste-to-energy” facilities.
B.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - Page 3
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Installation of door hardware.
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.
C.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
D.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
A.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with electrical rough-in and installation of associated and adjacent components.
B.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT REQUIRED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify electrical and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
B.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional
overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
C.
Install hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00 in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00 - Page 1
SECTION 06 41 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B.
Countertops.
C.
Cabinet hardware.
D.
Preparation for installing utilities.
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 08 56 59 - Bullet Resistant Transaction Window.
C.
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.
A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009.
C.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
D.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.
C.
Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of plastic laminate.
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
A.
Protect units from moisture damage.
A.
During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building
spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI
Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.
Hardwood: Use solid hardwood species, color, grain, and grade for semi-exposed portions of cabinetry.
Job #09270
06 41 00 - Page 1
1.
B.
Semi-Exposed Surfaces - Drawer Boxes: Species Birch.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2-2002; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant
adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required.
2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Arborite, division of ITW Canada: www.arborite.com.
2. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
3. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar\Pionite\Panolam: www.panolamindustries.com.
4. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
B.
Colors will be selected from manufacturer's standard samples and may be a combination of selections from
any and all manufacturers.
1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected.
4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed
backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
2.04 COUNTERTOPS
A.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL, conventionally
fabricated and self-edge banded.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.
B.
Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width
to match component thickness.
1. Color: As selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Use at all countertop edges.
C.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
1. The following fasteners are not acceptable:
a. "Drywall"-type screws, regardless of size, thread style or coatings.
b. Staples.
c. "European"-style.
d. Mechanical, whether concealed or exposed.
e. Nails.
f.
Plastic gussets, braces or angles.
D.
Cable Grommets: Standard plastic cable grommets; spring-loaded self-closing, in color to be selected by
Design Professional.
1. Opening Diameter: Minimum 2-3/8 inches.
2. Product: "GRS-60" manufactured by The Engineered Products Company (EPCO):
www.epcohardware.com.
3. Quantity: As shown on Drawings.
2.06 HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as scheduled for quality grade specified.
B.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and
coordinated self rests, polished chrome, or satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.
1. Product: #346 ANO manufactured by Knape & Vogt.
C.
Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, 4 inch centers, [finish to be selected by Design Professional].
1. Product: MC402-4 manufactured by Epco Co..
06 41 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
D.
Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.
1. Product: CLPN05 manufactured by Kenstan Lock Co..
2. Product: Elbow catch for inactive door, strike plate has slot to provide adjustment, stamped steel;
polished chrome; #1016-N manufactured by Epco Co.
E.
Catches: Roller-Type, steel case, zinc finish.
1. Product: #503 manufactured by Epco Co.
F.
Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Full extension with overtravel.
2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Positive type.
5. Products:
a. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 8405 (8505 at file drawers):
www.knapeandvogt.com.
G.
Hinges: Semiconcealed, steel five knuckle type type, finish and color as selected by Design Professional.
2.07 FABRICATION
A.
Cabinet Doors: Flush style.
B.
Cabinet Body Members:
1. Acceptable Joinery Technique:
a. Tops, Exposed Ends and Bottoms: Doweled (3 inches OC) and pressure-glued.
b. Face Frames and Plant-On Backs: Butt joint, pressure-glued and fastened with high thread
screws (NOT drywall-type screws) at eight (8) inches OC.
2. The following styles of joinery are not acceptable:
a. "European" assembly screws.
b. Concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners.
c. Spline or Biscuit.
d. 90 degree butt joints.
e. Mitered joints (Full faced or lock).
f.
Square shoulder.
g. Plastic or metal brackets, braces, gussets or angles.
C.
Drawer Members:
1. Acceptable Joinery Techniques: Dovetail, Dowel, French Dovetail, Lock Shoulder.
2. The following styles of joinery are not acceptable:
a. "European" assembly screws.
b. Concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners.
c. Spline or Biscuit.
d. 90 degree butt joints.
e. Mitered joints (Full faced or lock).
f.
Square shoulder.
g. Plastic or metal brackets, braces, gussets or angles.
D.
Cabinets and shelves shall be constructed of the following materials:
1. Cabinet Body: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick.
a. For cabinets that exceed 36 inches in width, the horizontal members shall be Medium Density
Fiberboard (MDF), 1 inch thick.
2. Cabinet Doors: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick.
3. Shelves: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick for shelves up to 36 inches in length, 1
inch thick for shelves over 36 inches in length.
a. Exposed shelves shall be laminated with 0.048 HPDL on all surfaces.
4. Backs: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/8 inch thick.
5. Drawer Fronts: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 3/4 inch thick.
6. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts:
Job #09270
06 41 00 - Page 3
a.
b.
c.
7.
8.
Solid hardwood lumber, 1/2 inch thick.
Hardwood plywood, 7 ply, no voids, 1/2 inch thick, eased edges at inside faces.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), 1/2 inch thick laminated on interior drawer surfaces with 0.048
HPDL; One (1) mm thick PVC edgebanding on top edge of box.
Drawer Bottoms: Tempered Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, captured in grooves on drawer frame.
Cabinet Liner: "Melamine"-type panels will be acceptable for use only at cabinet interiors and
adjustable shelves which are closed to view by doors. Open casework which is exposed to view,
without doors or drawers, shall receive 0.048 HPDL finishes on all surfaces. All other surfaces,
including tops and bottoms of wall hung cabinets shall receive 0.048 HPDL finishes regardless of the
position or elevation of the member.
a. Cabinet liner is not acceptable on exposed adjustable shelves.
E.
Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
F.
Edging: Fit doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any
single length.
G.
Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
H.
Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured
sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim.
I.
Provide minimum 5 mm holes, one (1) inch on center w/dual pin supports for shelving; centerline of holes
shall be a minimum of one (1) inch and a maximum of three (3) inches from the front and back edge of the
depth of the shelf to be supported with a spread of no less than 60% of the shelf in any case.
J.
Adhere back splash to countertop substrate and secure with wood screws at 8 inches on center.
K.
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site
dimensions. Seal cut edges.
L.
Install locks on all doors and drawers indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
C.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim for this purpose.
D.
Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
E.
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match
surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
F.
Locate cable grommets in countertops as per Owner's preference and install per manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
06 41 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
C.
Adjust all doors and drawers to provide equal margins.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean casework, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
06 41 00 - Page 5
SECTION 06 42 16
WOOD-VENEER PANELING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Custom wood veneer paneling.
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Grounds and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of wood veneer faced paneling.
A.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
B.
HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood &
Veneer Association; 2004 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.
1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.
2. Include plan of panel number sequencing.
3. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of finished plywood, 10 x 10 inch in size, illustrating wood grain and
specified finish.
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELING
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI
Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
B.
Flat Paneling:
1. Species: Red oak.
2. Cut: Rift.
3. Panels: Veneer of full width and balanced sequence matched.
4. Visible Edges and Reveals: Match faces.
5. Outside Corners: Mitered and splined.
2.02 WOOD-BASED MATERIALS - GENERAL
A.
Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1 Grade A; veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; of grain
quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.03 ADHESIVES AND FASTENERS
A.
Adhesives: Type suitable for intended purpose, complying with applicable air quality regulations.
Job #09270
06 42 16 - Page 1
B.
Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color.
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
Prepare panels for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B.
Finish exposed edges of panels as specified by grade requirements.
C.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting and scribing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
C.
Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to
receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade
indicated.
B.
Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to interior conditions.
C.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level, using concealed fasteners.
D.
Where necessary to cut and fit on site, scribe work abutting other components. Do not use additional
overlay trim to conceal gaps.
E.
Set fasteners, fill with wood filler, and finish to match panel finish.
F.
Touch up damaged finish to match original, using materials provided by fabricator; replace components that
cannot be refinished like new.
3.03 PREPARATION FOR FIELD FINISHING
A.
Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B.
Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
06 42 16 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 07 81 00
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Fireproofing of interior structural steel.
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
A.
B.
ASTM E736 - Standard Test Method For Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
C.
ASTM E759 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material Applied to
Structural Members; 1992 (Reapproved 2005).
D.
ASTM E760 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material
Applied to Structural Members; 1992 (Reapproved 2005).
E.
ASTM E937 - Standard Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM)
Applied to Structural Members; 1993 (Reapproved 2011).
A.
Coordinate with placement of ceiling hanger tabs, mechanical component hangers, and electrical
components.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations of use.
A.
not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, and:
1. Having minimum five years of documented experience.
2. Approved by manufacturer.
A.
Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate material and surrounding air is below 40
degrees F.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during application and 24 hours afterward, to dry applied
material.
C.
Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
1. Include coverage for fireproofing to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking, spalling,
separation, and blistering.
Job #09270
07 81 00 - Page 1
2.
Reinstall or repair failures that occur within warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Sprayed-On Fireproofing:
1. Carboline Company: www.carboline.com.
2. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com.
3. Isolatek International Inc: www.isolatek.com.
4. Southwest Fireproofing Products Company: www.sfrm.com.
2.02 FIREPROOFING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide assemblies as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Provide UL fire-rated assemblies to hourly ratings as follows:
1. Interior steel girders and beams: 2 hours.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material for Interior Applications: Manufacturer's standard factory mixed material,
which when combined with water is capable of providing the indicated fire resistance, and conforming to the
following requirements:
1. Bond Strength: 150 psf, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E736 when set and dry.
2. Dry Density: As required by fire resistance design.
3. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling or delamination, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E760.
4. Corrosivity: No evidence of corrosion, when tested in accordance with ASTM E937.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 0 and maximum smoke developed of 0,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Effect of Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E759.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer Adhesive: Of type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer.
B.
Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer of fireproofing material.
C.
Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath; 3.4 lb/sq ft, galvanized finish.
D.
Water: Clean, potable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive fireproofing.
B.
Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing are in place.
C.
Verify that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items that would interfere with application of fireproofing have
not been installed.
D.
Verify that voids and cracks in substrate have been filled. Verify that projections have been removed where
fireproofing will be exposed to view as a finish material.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Perform tests as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer in situations where adhesion of fireproofing to
substrate is in question.
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could affect bond by scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or sandblasting.
07 81 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
C.
Prepare substrates to receive fireproofing in strict accordance with instructions of fireproofing manufacturer.
D.
Apply fireproofing manufacturer's recommended bonding agent on primed steel.
E.
Protect surfaces not scheduled for fireproofing and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and
dusting.
F.
Close off and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Install metal lath over structural members as indicated.
B.
Apply primer adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Apply fireproofing in thickness and density necessary to achieve required ratings, with uniform density and
texture.
D.
In exposed locations, trowel surface smooth and form square edges, using tools and procedures
recommended by fireproofing manufacturer.
E.
Apply sealer at the rate recommended by fireproofing manufacturer.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect the installed fireproofing after application and curing for integrity, prior to its concealment. Ensure
that actual thicknesses, densities, and bond strengths meet requirements for specified ratings.
B.
Re-inspect the installed fireproofing for integrity of fire protection, after installation of subsequent Work.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debris.
B.
Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not required to be fireproofed.
C.
At exposed fireproofing, clean surfaces that have become soiled or stained, using manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
07 81 00 - Page 3
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Firestopping systems.
B.
Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies, whether
indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
A.
Section 20 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Firestopping of mechanical work.
B.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Firestopping of electrical work.
A.
ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2006.
B.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
C.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
A.
Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested
in accordance with methods indicated.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.
A.
Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after
installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F
Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that
meets all other specified requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than
required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
Job #09270
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - Page 1
B.
Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible
silicone sealant; conforming to the following:
1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.
2. Color: Black, dark gray, or red.
3. Manufacturers:
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.
b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
C.
Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested
assembly design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect
bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
completely closing openings.
B.
Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Install labelling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 07 90 05
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Sealants required in conjunction with countertops.
B.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
C.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
D.
Section 20 00 00 - Basic Mechaincal Requirements: Sealants required in conjunction with fixtures.
A.
ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005.
B.
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005.
C.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
D.
ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam
(Closed-Cell); 2005.
E.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5
years experience.
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit
loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Sealants:
1. Bondaflex/May National Associates, Inc: www.bondaflex.com.
2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
Job #09270
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - Page 1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
SIKA Corporation, USA: www.sika-corp.com.
Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
considered if the request is submitted and approved within the parameters outlined in the bidding
documents.
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)
content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
Type A - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single
component, paintable.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
C.
Type B - Fixture/Tile Sealant: Silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant.
1. Color: Colors as selected.
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between "wet" countertops and wall surfaces.
D.
Type C - Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component,
solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.
1. Color: Colors as selected.
2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent.
3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F.
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30.
a. Glazing.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50
percent larger than joint width.
C.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and
material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
D.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F.
Tool joints concave.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - Page 3
SECTION 08 12 13
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Non-fire-rated steel frames.
B.
Fire-rated steel door frames.
C.
Interior glazed light frames.
A.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware and weatherstripping.
B.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for borrowed lites.
C.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities;
International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors
and Frames; 1998 (R2004).
C.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
D.
NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
E.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
F.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
G.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and
locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying
location of different finishes, if any.
A.
with minimum three years of documented experience.
A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Frames:
1. Amweld International LLC: www.amweld.com.
Job #09270
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 12 13 - Page 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
2.02 STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on
drawings.
3. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in
addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
4. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one
type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior
door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for
exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most
stringent.
5. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted.
6. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member to fill opening without
cutting masonry units.
7. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
B.
Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Face welded type.
1. Grade: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 3, 14 gauge.
2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
C.
Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Grade: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 3, 14 gauge
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive
pressure").
a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
D.
Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames,
and as indicated on drawings.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of
pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
B.
Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable
grout is prohibited.
C.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.04 FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 12 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D.
Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout
before setting will not deform frames.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
F.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
G.
Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 12 13 - Page 3
SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration.
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
B.
Section 08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
A.
AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork
Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association; 2004.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for
hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and
sheen.
E.
LEED Report: Submit for wood products made from sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused
wood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, and locally-sourced wood, as specified in Section 01 35 15.
A.
with minimum three years of documented experience.
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;
or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more
than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
A.
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements for additional warranty requirements.
B.
See Construction Manager's General Requirements for additional warranty requirements.
C.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
D.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective
materials, and telegraphing core construction.
Job #09270
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
B.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc: www.algomahardwoods.com.
2. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com.
3. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
4. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.
5. Lambton DoorsMarshfield Door Systems: www.lambtondoors.com.
6. Marshfield Door Systems: www.marshfielddoors.com.
7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.: www.mohawkdoors.com.
8. VT Industries: www.vtindustries.com.
2.02 DOORS
A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as
indicated above.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, rift
cut, slip veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated.
1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer.
2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed.
B.
Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C.
Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.
D.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware
requirements and dimensions.
E.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in
accordance with specified quality standard.
F.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A.
Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard:
1. Transparent Finish: Transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Custom quality, satin sheen.
B.
Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C.
Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - Page 2
Job #09270
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
B.
Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner,
over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.
B.
Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over
an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.
C.
Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an
imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - Page 3
SECTION 08 33 13
COILING COUNTER DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware.
B.
Electric motor operation; wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
A.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings.
B.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Power to disconnect.
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
B.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.
C.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007.
D.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009, Revision 1 2010.
E.
UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of construction and
finish.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware locations,
and installation details.
D.
Project Record Documents: Include as-built electrical diagrams for electrical operation and connection to
fire alarm system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Coiling Counter Doors:
1. Design is based on product manufactured by Cornell Iron Works, Inc.; Product Model ESC10:
www.cornelliron.com.
2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS
A.
Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: Aluminum slat curtain.
1. Mounting: As indicated.
2. Nominal Slat Size: 1-1/4 inches wide.
3. Slat Profile: Flat.
4. Finish: Factory powder coated.
5. Color: As selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's custom range.
6. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated.
Job #09270
08 33 13 - Page 1
7.
8.
9.
Hood: Manufacturer's standard; material and finish to match curtain.
Operation: Electric motor.
Exterior keyed lock and latch handle.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats.
1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent
lateral movement.
2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position.
3. Aluminum Slats: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), aluminum alloy Type 6063; minimum thickness 0.05
inch.
B.
Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets of same metal.
1. Aluminum Guides: Extruded aluminum channel, with wool pile runners along inside.
C.
Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
D.
Lock Cylinders: Cylinder type; keyed master keyed.
E.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing torque
sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at
mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
Electrically Operated Doors: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
B.
Electric Operators:
1. Mounting: Side mounted.
2. Motor Enclosure: NEMA MG 1.
3. Motor Rating: As recommended by manufacturer; continuous duty.
4. Motor Voltage: 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.
5. Opening Speed: 6 inches per second.
6. Manual override in case of power failure.
C.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
2. Surface mounted.
D.
Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop
operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without
distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members
only.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 27 17.
F.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
08 33 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
08 33 13 - Page 3
SECTION 08 56 59
BULLET RESISTANT TRANSACTION WINDOW
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Bullet resistant transaction window.
B.
Transaction tray.
A.
Section 02 41 00 - Demolition.
B.
Section 06 20 00 - Carpentry.
C.
Section 08 88 56 - Ballistics-Resistant Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
B.
ASTM F 1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials And Systems; 2008.
C.
UL 752 9th Edition - Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment dated Jan. 27, 1995.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data substantiating that products comply.
1. Provide printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents.
C.
Shop drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of windows. Include details, elevations and installation
requirement of finish hardware and cleaning.
A.
Deliver windows crated to provide protection during transit and job storage
B.
Inspect windows upon delivery for damage. Unless minor defects can be made to meet the Architect’s
specifications and satisfaction, damaged parts should be removed and replaced.
C.
Store windows at building site under cover in dry location.
A.
Field measurements: Check opening by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded
measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay
of work.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
All material and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of one (1) year from the
original date of purchase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S
A.
Armortex Bullet Resistant Products: www.armortex.com.
B.
Chicago Bullet Proof Systems: www.chicagobulletproof.com.
C.
C. R. Laurence Co., Inc: www.crlaurence.com.
Job #09270
08 56 59 - Page 1
D.
National Bullet Proof, Inc: www.nationalbulletproof.com.
E.
Overly Door Company: www.overly.com.
F.
Total Security Solutions: www.tsssecuritysolutions.com.
G.
Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be considered if
the request is submitted and approved within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Frames: Stainless Steel bullet resistant frame modules shall be to the standards established by U.L. 752
Protection Level 2. Frames are to be constructed of formed stainless steel, lined with U.L. listed bullet
resistant fiberglass for Level 2. Replacement of glazing shall be from the secure side of the window or wall
unit and does not require the removal of the frame from the opening. Shapes and sizes are to be in
accordance with the contract drawings.
1. Stainless Steel Framing: ASTM A 666, Type 304; minimum 0.075, 14 gage inch thick.
2. Frames must utilize testing recognized under the standards established by U.L. 752 for all
bullet-resistant components.
B.
Fittings: Stainless Steel, Type 304, brushed finish.
1. Clamps: Including corner, U-Clamp, T-Clamp, Buttress, Baffle and others as required to provide an
installation as shown on the Drawings.
2. Spacers: Stainless Steel, Type 304, brushed finish.
a. Product: "CATALOG No. PB011" manufactured by C.R. Laurence Company, Inc.
b. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
documents.
C.
Glazing: The glazing must be in accordance with U.L. 752 testing standards
1. Level 2. Laminated glass.
2. RE: Section 08 88 56 - Ballistics-Resistant Glazing.
D.
Deal Tray: Stainless Steel, 16 gauge, Type 304, brushed finish with recessed tray.
1. Dimensions: 12 x 10 x 1-9/16 inches (Outside edge of flanges).
a. Product: "CATALOG No. CTDB12" manufactured by C.R. Laurence Company, Inc.
b. Substitutions: Products manufactured by others that meet or exceed this specification may be
documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install frames and glazing in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
Clean frame and glazing surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the
manufacturer’s instructions. Remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt or other substances.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that all
the windows do not incur any damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at the time of
acceptance.
END OF SECTION
08 56 59 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items
specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of hardware.
B.
C.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
D.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
E.
Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed
in the hardware sets:
1. Cabinet Hardware.
2. Overhead and Coiling doors
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of
the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of
the Specifications.
2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building
accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction
and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.
3. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state and local building code
requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of
doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels.
4. Hardware Supplier:
a. Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate
inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 50 miles of the project. The distributor
must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in
employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
5. Manufacturer:
a. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with
requirements.
b. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Pre-installation Meeting:
1. Before hardware installation, General Contractor will request a hardware installation meeting be
conducted on the installation of hardware; specifically that of locksets, closers, exit devices, overhead
stops and coordinators. Manufacturer's representatives of the above products, in conjunction with the
hardware supplier for the project, shall conduct the meeting. Meeting to be held at job site and
attended by installers of hardware for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Meeting to address
proper coordination and installation of hardware, per finish hardware schedule for this specific project,
by using installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates, physical product samples and installation
videos.
2. When any electrical hardware is specified this meeting shall also include the following trades/installers:
Electrical, Security, Alarm systems and Design Professional.
Job #09270
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 1
3.
4.
Convene one week or more prior to commencing work of this Section.
The Hardware Supplier shall include the cost of this meeting in his proposal.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Hardware Schedule
1. Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed in Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements.
2. Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for
the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise.
3. Schedule will include the following:
a. Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set.
b. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as follows:
CATEGORY
Hinges
Locksets
Kickplates
SPECIFIED
Manufacturer A
Manufacturer X
Open
SCHEDULED
Manufacturer B
Manufacturer X
Manufacturer Z
c.
d.
4.
5.
Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations.
Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing,
size, door material, frame material, and UL listing.
e. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish.
f.
Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers.
g. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets.
h. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions
and specialty hardware.
i.
"Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved."
j.
Typed Copy.
k. Double-Spacing.
l.
8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets
m. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols.
Product Data:
a. Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware.
b. Submit product data with hardware schedule.
Key Schedule:
a. Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have been
followed.
b. Submit as a separate schedule.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number,
and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Refer to General Requirements for warranty requirements.
B.
During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to
the work. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this
requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.
B.
Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable
product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, it is
understood that this is the owner’s Building Standard and "no substitution" is allowed.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
C.
D.
Section 1605 of The American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) includes “Buy American Provisions”
that may supersede any of the product approvals in individual Specification Sections contained in this
Project Manual.
2.02 HINGES
A.
Furnish hinges of class and size as listed in sets.
1. Numbers used are Ives (IVE).
2. Products of a BHMA member are acceptable.
2.03 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS - MORTISE-TYPE
A.
IR-Schlage as listed in sets.
B.
Locksets shall be manufactured from heavy gauge steel, minimum lockcase thickness 1/8”, containing
components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.
C.
Locks are to have a standard 2 ¾” backset with a full ¾” throw two-piece stainless steel mechanical
anti-friction latchbolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.
D.
Lockcase shall be easily handed without chassis disassembly by removing handing screw on lockcase and
installing in opposite location on reverse side. Changing of door hand bevel from standard to reverse hand
shall be done by removing the lockcase scalp plate, and pulling and rotating the latchbolt 180 degrees.
E.
Lock trim shall be through-bolted to the door to assure correct alignment and proper operation. Lever trim
shall have external spring cage mechanism to assist in support of the lever weight. Thumb turns shall have
“EZ” thumbturn equal to IR-Schlage L583-363.
F.
Function numbers are IR-Schlage.
1. IR-Schlage
L9000
G.
Lockset Trim:
1. IR-Schlage
H.
6N
Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide
strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond door frame trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to
center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors.
2.04 CLOSERS
A.
Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder.
Cylinder body shall be 1 ½” in diameter, and double heat treated pinion shall be 11/16” in diameter with
double D slab drive arm connection.
B.
Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120
degrees F to -30 degrees F.
C.
Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced
opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical
valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.
D.
All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forged forearms for parallel arm closers).
E.
All surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles
by a recognized independent testing laboratory.
F.
Closers will have Powder coating finish certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an
independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification.
G.
Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers and
supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule.
Job #09270
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 3
H.
IR-LCN Series as listed in sets.
2.05 KICK PLATES
A.
Furnish .050 inches thick 20" high x door width less 1.5" at both faces of doors. Where glass or louvers
prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2”.
B.
Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable.
2.06 WALL STOPS
A.
Length to exceed projection of all other hardware. Provide with threaded studs and expansion shields for
masonry wall construction. Install with slope at top.
1. IR-Ives WS33
2. BHMA L12011 or L12021
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in Hardware
Sets.
2.08 FASTENERS
A.
Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields
for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish
machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors
and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type
screws are not acceptable.
B.
Sex bolts will not be permitted on reinforced metal doors or wood doors where blocking is specified.
2.09 FINISHES
A.
Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626. Provide finish for each item as indicated in sets.
2.10 TEMPLATES AND HARDWARE LOCATION
A.
Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and
frame manufacturers.
B.
Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge.
C.
Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates.
2.11 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
All cylinders for this project will be supplied by one supplier regardless of door type and location.
B.
The Finish Hardware supplier will meet with the Contractor and/or Owner to finalize keying requirements and
obtain keying instructions in writing.
1. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in the proposal.
C.
Provide a cylinder for all hardware components capable of being locked.
D.
Provide cylinders master and grand master keyed to existing system according to Owner's instructions.
Provide two change keys for each cylinder, master and grand master keys as required by Owner.
E.
Deliver all permanent keys, key blanks and other security keys as determined in keying meeting.
F.
Key Material: Provide manufacturer's standard embossed keys of nickel silver to ensure durability. Furnish
keys in the following quantities:
1. 2 each Control Keys.
2. 2 each Grand Master Keys.
3. 4 each Master keys per master group.
4. 2 each Keys per cylinder.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1. Install hardware according to manufacturers installations and template dimensions. Attach all items of
finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture
of the item.
2. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames will be drilled and
tapped for machine screws.
3. Locations:
a. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items.
b. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.
CATEGORY
DIMENSION
Hinges
Door Manufacturer's Standard
Levers
Door Manufacturer's Standard
Wall Stops/Holders
At Head
3.02 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A.
Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative to inspect material furnished and its installation and
adjustment, to make final hardware adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care
and maintenance of hardware.
B.
Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the factory representative and adjusted after
installation and after the HVAC system is in operation, to insure correct installation and proper adjustment
in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also
recording locations and kinds of noncompliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Design
Professional with copies to the General Contractor, hardware distributor and hardware installer.
3.03 TECHNICAL AND WARRANTY INFORMATION
A.
At the completion of the project, the technical and warranty information coalesced and kept on file by the
General Contractor shall be given to the Owner. In addition to both the technical and warranty information,
all factory order acknowledgement numbers supplied to the General Contractor during the construction
period shall be given to the Owner. The warranty information and factory order acknowledgement numbers
shall serve to both expedite and properly execute any warranty work that may be required on the various
hardware items supplied on the project.
B.
Submit to General Contractor, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special
installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products.
3.04 SCHEDULE - SEE SECTION 08 71 01
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - Page 5
SECTION 08 71 01
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The following schedule of hardware is intended as a guide and shall not be considered entirely
inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted, provide said door or item with same
hardware as required for similar purpose and location.
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
QTY
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
DESCRIPTION
HINGE
STOREROOM LOCK
MORTISE CYLINDER
ELECTRIC STRIKE
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP
POWER SUPPLY
ACCESS CONTROL
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L9080L 06N
(MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM)
6210 FSE DS
4011
8400 10" X 1 1/2" LDW
WS407CVX
PS902
(PROVIDED BY SECURITY
CONTRACTOR)
FINISH
652
626
626
630
689
630
630
LGR
MFR
IVE
SCH
C-R
VON
LCN
IVE
IVE
SCE
PRESENTING AN AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL WILL ENERGIZE THE ELECTRIC STRIKE
AND ALLOW ACCESS. FREE EGRESS IS ALWAYS ALLOWED.
COORDINATE SYSTEM OPERATION AND COMPONENT LOCATIONS WITH THE OWNER,
THE ARCHITECT AND ALL RELATED TRADES.
QTY
3
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
DESCRIPTION
HINGE
STOREROOM LOCK
MORTISE CYLINDER
WALL STOP
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L9080L 06N
(MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM)
WS407CVX
FINISH
652
626
626
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
C-R
IVE
OUTSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS LOCKED AND REQUIRES A KEY TO ACCESS. FREE EGRESS
IS ALWAYS ALLOWED.
QTY
3
1
1
EA
EA
EA
DESCRIPTION
HINGE
PASSAGE SET
WALL STOP
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L9010 06N
WS407CVX
FINISH
652
626
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
IVE
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
08 71 01 – Page 1
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Glass.
B.
Glazing compounds and accessories.
A.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
B.
Section 08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames: Glazed borrowed lites.
A.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.
ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers; 2005.
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
D.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
E.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated
Glass; 2004.
F.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2010.
G.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
H.
GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration and
design.
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation
methods.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including
replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
A.
Single Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass.
Job #09270
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 1
3.
4.
Tint: Clear.
Thickness: 1/4 inch.
B.
Fire-Rated Safety Glazing:
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in fire doors.
b. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire
rating.
c. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Type: Glass-ceramic safety glazing.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
C.
Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.
3. Tint: Clear.
D.
Security Glazing: Laminated glass/plastic glazing.
1. Application: Locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Inner and Outer Layers: Fully Tempered Float Glass; provide glass that has been tempered by the
tong-less horizontal method..
a. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3. Interlayer: Vinyl.
a. Thickness: 0.060 (1/32) inch.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Thicknesses: As indicated.
B.
Glass-Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL- or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR
1201 test requirements for Category II with or without the use of a surface-applied film.
1. 20-Minute Fire Doors: Hose stream test is not required.
2. Products:
a. O'Keeffe's Inc. SAFTI Division; SAFTIFIRST.
b. SCHOTT North America Inc; Fire Rated Ceramic Glass.
c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America;.
2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
B.
Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex, knife grade consistency; grey color.
C.
Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness
of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
D.
Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties;
non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A
hardness of 15 to 25; black color.
2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1
inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x
height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch
long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A
durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864
Option I; Gray color.
E.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede
moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 GLAZING METHODS
3.04 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
D.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
E.
Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.
F.
Knife trim protruding tape.
3.05 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight
line.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
D.
Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4
Job #09270
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 3
inch below sight line.
E.
Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level
line.
F.
Trim protruding tape edge.
3.06 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A.
Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24
inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line.
B.
Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips.
C.
Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to
straight line.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.08 SCHEDULE
A.
Hollow Steel Frames - Interior:
1. Fire-rated openings: Ceramic glass, 1/4 inch thick.
2. Other Openings: Fully Tempered Safety Glass, 1/4 inch thick.
3. Secure Openings: Fully Tempered Glass with Vinyl Interlayer, minimum 5/16 inch thick.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
08 80 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 08 88 56
BALLISTICS-RESISTANT GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Laminated security glazing.
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
B.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.
C.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework.
D.
Section 08 56 59 - Bullet Resistant Transaction Window.
E.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test.
B.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
C.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass -- Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
D.
ASTM C1172 – Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
E.
ASTM C1349 - Standard Specification for Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate.
F.
ASTM E773 - Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
G.
ASTM E774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
H.
ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems.
I.
CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
J.
HP White TP-0500 - Transparent Materials for Use in Forced Entry or Containment Barriers. Earlier
versions of this standard will not be accepted.
K.
Walker, McGough, Foltz and Lyerla - WMFL 8801 Attack Resistant Standard.
L.
Underwriter’s Laboratories - UL 752 Bullet Resisting Equipment.
M. National Institute of Justice - NIJ 0108.01 Ballistic Resistant Protective Materials.
N.
GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
O.
GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
P.
GANA Laminated Glass Design Guide; Glass Association of North America.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.
Bullet-Resistant Panels: A multi-ply polycarbonate lamination that is designed to resist penetration from
medium-to-super-power small arms and high-power rifles and to minimize spalling.
Job #09270
08 88 56 - Page 1
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements
1. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, windloads and impact
loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation;
deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.
2. Provide glass products in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) required to meet or
exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in-service conditions per ASTM E1300.
a. Minimum thickness of annealed or heat-treated glass products is selected, so the worst-case
probability of failure does not exceed the following:
1) 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically or not over 15 degrees from the vertical plane
and under wind action.
2) 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical plane and under
action of wind and/or snow.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: Submit 12-inch quare samples of each type of glass indicated (except clear monolithic glass
products), and 12-inch long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket
exposed to view.
C.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each security glazing type, including type of
materials, thickness, method of test, test performance report and glazing and cleaning instructions.
D.
Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer, indicating
that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, as well as other
glazing materials including insulating units.
E.
Glazing Contractor shall provide test reports showing that the glass meets the requirements of any security
test reports specified on drawings.
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing security glass, types as specified, with a
minimum documented 5 years of successful in-service performance.
B.
Installers Qualification: Engage a firm experienced in installing security glass, types as specified, with a
minimum documented 5 years of successful in-service performance.
C.
Testing Agencies: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable testing agencies are:
1. HP White Laboratories, Inc.
2. Warnock-Hersey International
3. Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Inc.
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc
D.
Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except
where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise
defined in this section or referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications
2. AAMA Publications
E.
Single-source fabrication responsibility: All fabricated glass shall be processed and supplied by a single
fabricator.
A.
Comply with manufacturer’s instruction for receiving, handling, storing and protecting glass & glazing
materials.
B.
Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification
08 88 56 - Page 2
Job #09270
labels intact.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
D.
Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass and damage/deterioration to coating on glass.
1.09 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements: Installation of glass products at ambient air temperature below 40 degrees F
(4.4 degrees C) is prohibited.
B.
Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, verify field measurements with drawing
dimensions prior to fabrication of glass products.
1.10 WARRANTY
A.
Provide written 5-year warranty from date of manufacture for laminated security glass. Warranty covers
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling installing, protecting and maintaining
practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Dlubak Corporation: www.dlubakcorporation.com.
B.
Global Security Glazing: www.security-glazing.com.
C.
Standard Bent Glass Corporation: www.standardbent.com.
D.
North American Specialty Glass: www.naspecialtyglass.com.
E.
The Rector Seal Co: www.rectorseal.com.
F.
Substitutions: Products from other manufacturers that meet or exceed this Specification may be
considered.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Security Glass Types
1. Provide glass types as indicated
B.
Laminated Assemblies: Laminated security glass assemblies are to be bonded with polyvinyl and/or
aliphatic polyurethane interlayers, as required, and fabricated in an autoclave using heat, plus pressure
producing products free of foreign substances and air pockets.
C.
Bullet-Resistant Security Glazing – Glass and Polycarbonate
1. Glass and Polycarbonate, Clear: Laminated acrylic/polycarbonate composite. Product shall comply
with:
a. UL 752, Level 2.
b. Overall nominal thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings.
c. Product shall be UL labeled.
D.
Glazing Products
1. Select appropriate glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and other glazing materials of proven compatibility
with other materials that they contact. These include, but are not limited to, glass products, insulating
glass unit seals and glazing channel substrates under installation and service conditions, as
demonstrated by testing and field experience.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Site Verification and Conditions
1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the glass.
Job #09270
08 88 56 - Page 3
2.
3.
4.
Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed.
Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protection
1. Handle and store product according to manufacturers’ recommendations.
B.
Surface Preparation
1. Clean and prepare glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass.
2. Remove coatings and other harmful materials that will prevent glass and glazing installation required to
comply with performance criteria specified.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other glazing
materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in the “GANA Glazing
Manual”.
B.
Install glass in prepared glazing channels and other framing members.
C.
Install setting blocks in rabbets as recommended by referenced glazing standards in GANA Glazing Manual
and IGMA Glazing Guidelines.
D.
Provide bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances and glazing material tolerances recommended by
GANA Glazing Manual.
E.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
F.
Distribute the weight of the glass unit along the edge rather than at the corner.
G.
Comply with manufacturer’s and referenced industry recommendations on expansion joints and anchors,
accommodating thermal movement, glass openings, use of setting blocks, edge, face and bite clearances,
use of glass spacers and edge blocks.
H.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation.
I.
Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction operations, such as
weld spatter, fireproofing or plaster.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application, using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
B.
Glass to be cleaned according to:
1. GANA Glass Informational Bulletin GANA 01-0300 - Proper Procedures for Cleaning Architectural
Glass Products.
2. GANA Glass Information Bulletin GANA TD-02-0402 – Heat-Treated Glass Surfaces Are Different.
C.
Do not use scrapers or other metal tools to clean glass.
END OF SECTION
08 88 56 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Metal stud wall framing.
B.
Gypsum wallboard.
C.
Joint treatment and accessories.
D.
Bullet resistant panels.
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members;
American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
C.
ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
D.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2009a.
E.
ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached
Gypsum Panel Products; 2009a.
F.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008.
G.
ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products
or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2007.
H.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007.
I.
ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base;
2009.
J.
ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2009.
K.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a.
L.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings
in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005).
M. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction;
2005.
N.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010.
O.
National Institute of Justice Ballistic Standards:
1. NIJ Standard 0108.01 - Type II-A
P.
UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Job #09270
09 21 16 - Page 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, joint finishing system, and
bullet-resistant board.
C.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance
with requirements.
D.
Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754, provide
independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.
E.
Test Reports: Bullet resistant sheathing and wallboard.
F.
Samples: Submit two samples of bullet-resistant board, 12 by 12 inches in size.
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.
B.
Partition Wall Studs: Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components; ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet
steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with
maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.
1. Thickness: 20 gauge.
2. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are
waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the
effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are
determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.
3. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
C.
Studs and Headers at Wall Openings: Heavy-duty, ASTM A653/A 653M:
1. Thickness: 16 gauge.
2. Dimensions: 3-5/8 x 3 x 2-1/16 x 3/4 inch and 6 x 3 x 2-1/4 x 3/4 inch.
3. Header Brackets: 14 gauge, 3-1/2 x 3-1/16 x 2 inch.
D.
Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
E.
Suspended Gypsum Board Ceiling Materials: All materials sized as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing
required:
1. Ceiling Channels: C or U-shaped.
2. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
3. Hanger Wire: Soft annealed steel wire, uncoated.
4. Furring Channel Clips: Formed wire shapes, uncoated steel.
5. Tie Wire: 18 gauge, soft annealed steel wire, uncoated.
F.
Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate
deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while
09 21 16 - Page 2
Job #09270
maintaining structural performance of partition.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by
applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design
of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized
coating.
3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems of fire rating
and movement required.
4. Deflection and Firestop Track:
a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while
maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) "Posi Clip" by Fire Trak Corporation.
2) "The System" by Metal-Lite, Inc.
5. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on
drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.
2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: www.gp.com/gypsum.
4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.
5. Temple-Inland Inc: www.templeinland.com.
6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
B.
Type A Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested
assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
C.
Bullet Resistant Panels: Woven roving, multi-ply, ballistic grade fiberglass cloth with thermoset polyester
resin; comply with UL 752 Level 2.
1. Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Panels: 5/16" nominal thickness, and 3.6 lbs. per sq. ft. nominal weight.
2. Product: "ARMORCORE" manufactured by Waco Composites Ltd: www.armorcore.com.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed
panel edges.
B.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.
1. Glass-Mat Faced Drywall Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as
otherwise indicated.
2. Paper-Faced Drywall Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
3. Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.
4. Skim-Coating Compound:
a. Chemical hardening type compound.
******OR******
Job #09270
09 21 16 - Page 3
5.
High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take
the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
C.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to
Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
D.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill
screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 16 inches on center.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
C.
Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.
1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of
studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs
unattached to track.
D.
Openings: Reinforce openings as specified above for weight of doors or operable panels, using special
shapes.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in
highly visible locations.
B.
Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring
over firm bearing.
1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.
C.
Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.
D.
Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends
occurring over firm bearing.
E.
Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.
F.
Bullet Resistant Sheathing and Wallboard:
1. Install bullet resistant sheathing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and with
manufacturer approved fasteners.
2. Cover all joints between boards with a 4 inch strip of the same thickness material as the boards,
centered on the joint.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.
Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
09 21 16 - Page 4
Job #09270
3.05 JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape,
bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.
B.
Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with powder-type vinyl-based joint compound
and finished with powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.
C.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically
indicated.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed
construction.
D.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
E.
Where Level 5 finish is indicated, skim-coat entire surface after have been properly treated; achieve a flat
and tool mark-free finish.
******OR******
F.
Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have
been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any
direction.
3.07 SCHEDULE
A.
Type A: All vertical surfaces, ceilings and bulkheads more than 8 feet AFF.
B.
Bullet-Resistant Panels: At areas noted on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
09 21 16 - Page 5
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical units.
A.
Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
B.
Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
A.
ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004.
B.
ASTM C 636/C 636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2006.
C.
ASTM E 580/E 580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2008a.
D.
ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008.
E.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
A.
Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is
provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Construction Manager's General Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Acoustical Units: 80 sq ft of each type and size.
A.
Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL for the fire resistance indicated.
B.
Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to,
during, and after acoustical unit installation.
Job #09270
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
3. Pinta Acoustic, Inc: www.pinta-acoustic.com/link.
4. USG: www.usg.com.
documents.
B.
Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
1. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire-resistive
assembly the suspension system is a part of.
C.
Acoustical Panels Type A: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches and 24 x 48 inches.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inches.
3. Composition: Wet felted.
4. Light Reflectance: 82 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
5. NRC Range: 50 to 60, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 33, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
7. Edge: Reveal edge.
8. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.
9. Product:
a. "CORTEGA" manufactured by Armstrong World Industries: www.armstrong.com.
b. "BAROQUE" manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation: www.bpb-na.com.
c. "RADAR" manufactured by USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Same as for acoustical units.
B.
Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars,
clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system
flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
2. At Concealed Grid: Provide exposed L-shaped molding.
C.
Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M, ASTM E 580/E 580M, and
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
B.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of
1:360.
C.
Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
D.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
E.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
F.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed
deflection capability.
H.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support
components independently.
I.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
J.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other
interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
G.
Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
H.
Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - Page 3
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Resilient base.
B.
Resilient stair accessories.
C.
Installation accessories.
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Rough Carpentry.
A.
ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; 2010e1.
B.
ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.
C.
FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; Federal Specifications and Standards;
Revision E, 1994.
D.
NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Design Professional's initial
selection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STAIR COVERING AT FOOT RESTS
A.
Stair Treads: Rubber; full depth of foot rest in one piece; tapered thickness; nosing not less than 1-5/8 inch
deep.
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with FS RR-T-650 requirements corresponding to type specified.
2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
3. Nominal Thickness: 0.1875 inch.
4. Nosing: Square.
5. Style: Hammered texture.
6. Color: Solid.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.
b. Flexco Floors: www.flexcofloors.com.
c. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
d. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
B.
Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color:
1. Thickness: 0.080 inch.
2. Manufacturers:
Job #09270
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - Page 1
c.
d.
Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows:
1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
2. Height: 4 inch.
3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
4. Finish: Satin.
5. Length: Roll.
6. Color: Solid color.
7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
8. Manufacturers:
c. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
d. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.
Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
C.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D.
Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Fit joints tightly.
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.
3.04 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
B.
Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.
C.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D.
Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.05 STAIR COVERINGS AT FOOT RESTS
A.
Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread.
B.
Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - Page 3
SECTION 09 68 13
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Carpet tile, fully adhered.
A.
ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering
Materials; 2006.
B.
ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; 2008b.
C.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
D.
CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current
Edition.
E.
NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C.
Samples: Submit manufacturers carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color
selected.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum
three years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five years experience.
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis for bid is Patcraft Commercial Carpet, a Berkshire Hathaway Company; Product "COLOR YOUR
WORLD TILE": www.patcraft.com.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Tandus: www.tandus.com.
2. Interface, Inc: www.interfaceinc.com.
3. Lees Carpets: www.leescarpets.com.
C.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Carpet Tile: Microweave patterned loop, Solution dyed.
1. Product: "COLOR YOUR WORLD TILE" manufactured by Patcraft Commercial Carpets:
www.patcraft.com.
Job #09270
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - Page 1
2.
3.
4.
Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal.
Thickness: 0.080 inch.
Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or
NFPA 253.
5. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
6. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3.5 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.
7. Gage: 1/10 inch.
8. Stitches: 10.0 per inch.
9. Pile Weight: 22 oz/sq yd.
10. Density Factor: 9900 kilotex.
11. Primary Backing Material: Non-woven synthetic.
12. Secondary Backing Material: Ecoworx.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Edge Strips: Vinyl, color as selected.
B.
Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum
VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing
compliance is acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are
ready to receive carpet tile.
B.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive
materials to sub-floor surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove existing carpet.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects
with sub-floor filler.
C.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D.
Vacuum clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
C.
Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D.
Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E.
Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines.
F.
Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
G.
Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
H.
Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
I.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - Page 3
SECTION 09 72 00
WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Surface preparation and prime painting.
A.
B.
ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
Finishes; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive.
C.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of wall covering, 8 x 10 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and
texture.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with
minimum five years of experience.
A.
Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability.
B.
Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.
C.
Do not store roll goods on end.
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required
by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.
B.
Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering.
C.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Koroseal/RJF International: www.koroseal.com.
B.
MDC Wallcoverings: www.mdcwall.com.
C.
Omnova Solutions Inc: www.omnova.com.
D.
the request is submitted within the parameters outlined in the bidding documents.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Requirements for All Wall Coverings:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
Job #09270
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - Page 1
2.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to surface texture
when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308.
B.
Wall Covering: Vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following:
1. Total Weight: 20 oz/sq yd.
2. Roll Width: 54 inches.
C.
Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate.
D.
Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate.
E.
Substrate Primer and Sealer: Acrylic latex type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of
the wall covering manufacturer.
B.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall coverings if
moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C.
Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater
than 1/16 inch/ft.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth.
B.
Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry.
C.
Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings
that exhibit loose surface defects.
E.
Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes.
F.
Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth.
G.
Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use wall covering in roll number sequence.
C.
Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.
D.
Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond
to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly.
E.
Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
F.
Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners.
G.
Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface.
H.
Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base.
I.
Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll.
J.
Wall covering is required behind fin tube cabinets.
K.
Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact adhesive
within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond.
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
L.
Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean
with dry cloth.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
B.
Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - Page 3
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, and varnishes.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing
equipment.
2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
3. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed
ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment,
unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat
black paint to visible surfaces.
d. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match
face panels.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment.
5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.
6. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
7. Ceramic and other tiles.
8. Glass.
9. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.
10. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
A.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
B.
Section 06 42 16 - Wood-Veneer Paneling.
C.
D.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.
E.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification.
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings;
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Job #09270
09 90 00 - Page 1
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum
three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five
years experience.
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for
mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F,
in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required
by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates,
moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior;
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B.
Paints, Stains and Transparent Coatings:
1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams: www.sherwin-williams.com.
2. Comex Group (Color Wheel, Frazee, General Paint, Kwal, or Parker): www.thecomexgroup.com.
3. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com.
4. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
5. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.
6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.
7. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.
C.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or
curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions
09 90 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.
4.
5.
of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter
than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single
production run.
Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other
method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon
compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate,
di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate,
ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone,
methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene),
1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
E.
Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
F.
Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
1. Selection to be made by Design Professional after award of contract.
2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost
to Owner.
3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Design Professional.
4. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they
are mounted on/under.
5. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to the
color coding scheme indicated.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A.
Wood, Transparent, Clear Urethane, Stain:
1. One coat of stain.
2. Satin: Two coats of Clear Urethane.
B.
New Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
C.
Existing Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
D.
Existing Ferrous Metals, Acrylic Latex, 2 Coat:
E.
Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with latex primer.
F.
Gypsum Board/Plaster, Acrylic Latex, 3 Coat:
Job #09270
09 90 00 - Page 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
One coat of latex primer sealer.
Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
Eggshell: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
Flat: Two coats of acrylic latex enamel.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and
clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not;
commercial quality.
B.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
C.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may
potentially affect proper application.
D.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Design Professional of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
E.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the
substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
D.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach.
Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, loose and flaking
paint, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after
repair.
I.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or
SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
J.
Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean
by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts
are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
K.
Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
09 90 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
surfaces.
L.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly
between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
M. Metal Frames to be Painted: Prime all surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
D.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
E.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
G.
Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.
Wipe excess from surface.
H.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove
daily from site.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.06 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
A.
Concrete Block Masonry: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
B.
Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior Ceilings and Bulkheads: Acrylic latex, flat.
2. Interior Walls: Acrylic latex, eggshell.
C.
Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior paneling: Clear urethane; satin .
D.
Steel Door Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; acrylic latex; semi-gloss.
E.
Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior: Acrylic latex, semi-gloss.
F.
Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Finish the following items:
a. Exposed surfaces of lintels.
b. All surfaces of new and existing steel railings.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
09 90 00 - Page 5
SECTION 20 00 00
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
General Requirements specifically applicable to Division 22 and 23.
B.
This Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, tools, construction
equipment and machinery, transportation, and all services required for the execution, completion and
operation of all mechanical systems, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in
the Work.
1.02 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with conditions which will affect work that is to be
performed. Submission of a proposal by this Contractor shall be conclusive evidence that this Contractor
has visited the site and has given proper consideration and evaluation of these conditions in preparation of
his proposal. No allowance shall be made to the Contractor for extra expense incurred due to neglect to
properly make this visit and examination.
B.
Where active sewers, gas, electric or other services are encountered during performance of this contract,
Contractor shall protect, brace and support them as required. Do not prevent, interrupt or disturb operation
of existing services that are to remain. Relocate existing services as required.
C.
Drawings show approximate locations of existing utilities. Contractor shall verify exact location of services
which they may expect to encounter.
A.
Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements.
B.
C.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
D.
E.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
F.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
All work shall be installed in accordance with applicable local and state regulations, including but not limited
to the following:
1. Plumbing work shall be done in accordance with plumbing code of the State of Michigan, local
regulations, codes, and ordinances, and any other codes or regulations having legal jurisdiction in the
area.
2. Mechanical work shall be done in accordance with applicable Standards and all State, Federal and
local codes, regulations or ordinances which may legally apply in the area.
3. In the event Drawings and Specifications conflict with applicable rules, regulations or codes, said rules,
regulations and codes shall govern Contractor. Should any change in Drawings and/or Specifications
be required to comply with rules, regulations or codes, Contractor shall notify Design Professional, in
writing, before entering into contract. After entering into contract, all work shall be completed without
addition to contract amount. Any changes in the work to secure certificates shall be made by
Contractor at his own expense.
4. Standards of Industry: Reference to industry standards where applicable:
a. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
b. AGA - American Gas Association
c. ASA - American Standards Association
Job #09270
20 00 00 - Page 1
d. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
e. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
f.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
g. AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association
h. NBFU - National Board of Fire Underwriters
i.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
j.
AWWA - American Water Works Association
k. FIA - Factory Insurance Association
l.
FM - Factory Mutual Insurance Companies
m. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc.
n. Local and State Codes
o. National Plumbing Codes
p. State of Michigan Boiler Act of 1965 and Board of Boiler Rules
q. Michigan Barrier Free Design Graphics Manual
r.
PDI - Plumbing Drainage Institute
1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Contractor shall file approval forms when required, obtain and pay for all required permits, pay all required
deposits, arrange for and pay for all required or necessary inspections.
B.
Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections in keeping with project progress to prevent
unnecessary delays. Upon completion of the project, Contractor shall submit all final inspection certificates
to Design Professional for Owner's file.
1.06 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements.
B.
Coordinate fully with all other Contractors and trades to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation
of interdependent systems and system elements.
C.
Installation shall be made so that all component parts function together as a workable system, which shall
be complete with all accessories necessary for proper operation. When installation is complete, all
equipment shall be operative and in proper adjustment. All work shall be executed in conformity with the
best practice so as to contribute to efficiency of operation, minimum maintenance, accessibility and
aesthetics.
D.
Contractor shall consult Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature, and specifications for all trades
to determine nature and extent of work specified in other sections which adjoins or attaches to their work.
E.
Contractor shall confer with other Contractors and Subcontractors at the site to coordinate the work in view
of job conditions so that interferences may be eliminated and maximum head room and clearance may be
obtained.
F.
In the event that interferences develop, Design Professional's decision will be final as to which trade shall
relocate its work and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of pipes, ductwork or
equipment to clear such interferences.
G.
Cutting, patching and painting resulting from this Contractor's improper location or coordination of the work
shall be done by Contractor who originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear
expenses.
H.
Contractor is responsible for providing and installing any access panels or doors which may be required to
provide access to valves, controls, fittings, etc. that are installed behind permanent walls, ceilings,
bulkheads, soffits or floors.
A.
Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for work and coordinate pipe, duct, and equipment
locations with other trades.
20 00 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
B.
All major patching and repairing of work caused by this Contractor shall be done by Contractor who
originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear expenses.
C.
No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be done without written permission from the Design
Professional.
D.
Provide fire stops for all mechanical openings in fire rated surfaces. Seal space between sleeves and pipes
with approved fire proofing material. Integrity of system shall be maintained to the rating of the item
pierced.
1.08 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the
contract. Drawings are not to be scaled nor serve as Shop Drawings.
B.
Drawings show design intent and this Contractor shall field check dimensions, actual locations, distances
and levels will be governed by actual field conditions and variations in equipment being provided.
C.
Contractor shall follow Drawings in laying out work and checking Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in
which work will be installed. Where headroom or space conditions are inadequate, Design Professional
shall be notified before proceeding with installation.
D.
Items not specifically mentioned in Specifications or noted on Drawings, but which are obviously necessary
to make a complete working installation shall be included at no extra cost to the Owner.
E.
If directed by Design Professional, this Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable
modifications in layout as needed to prevent conflicts with work of other trades or for proper execution of
work.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Design Professional will not be responsible for errors in quantities, dimensions to fit job conditions, details of
fabrication to insure proper assembly at job site, or for errors resulting from mistakes in Submittals even
though reviewed.
C.
Responsibility for these items rests with Contractor and his Suppliers.
D.
Any equipment used by the Contractor that is not specifically shown on drawings is considered alternate
equipment and all additional installation costs incurred by the use of this equipment shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
1.10 EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
Only substitutions made by addendum, prior to receipt of bids, will be binding.
C.
no fault of this Contractor.
D.
Where equipment manufacturer's names are listed, they are listed not only to indicate an acceptable
manufacturer, but further to insure providing a certain quality, a feature, or other item of design not
specifically mentioned in the detailed description.
E.
Where Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified or detailed on the Drawings,
which requires any redesign of structure, partitions, foundations, wiring or any other part of mechanical,
electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new Drawings and detailing required therefore,
shall be prepared by this Contractor at their own expense.
Job #09270
20 00 00 - Page 3
F.
Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of piping, ductwork and
equipment from that specified or indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings, Contractor shall furnish and
install any such piping, ductwork, etc., and any other additional equipment required by system at no
additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall also be responsible for electrical and other trade work not
mentioned above upon such equipment substitution.
1.11 CLEANING AND FINISHING
A.
B.
All piping, insulation, unfinished iron work, fixtures and equipment shall be cleaned at completion of Work.
C.
Two (2) weeks after turning systems over to Owner, all strainers, filters, and automatic controls shall be
cleaned and checked.
D.
Owner shall be instructed on system operations and maintenance, including lubrication, filter replacement or
cleaning, seasonal change over as required, control operation, and such other information as necessary.
1.12 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
A.
Contractor shall guarantee all of their work and the work of their subcontractors to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the work, unless a
longer period is stipulated under specific headings, and shall repair or replace at no additional cost to
Owner any material or equipment developing defects and shall also make good any damage caused by
such defects or the correction of defects. Repairs or replacements shall be guaranteed for one year, dated
from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement. This replacement shall be binding even though it will
exceed product guarantees normally furnished by some manufacturers.
B.
Contractor shall submit their own and each equipment manufacturer’s written certificates, warrantying that
each such item of equipment furnished complies with all requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Note that guarantee shall run from date of final acceptance of the work, NOT from date of installation of a
device or piece of equipment.
END OF SECTION
20 00 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Piping insulation.
B.
Jackets and accessories.
A.
B.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
A.
ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004.
B.
ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007.
C.
ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
D.
ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2007.
E.
ASTM C 585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal
Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 1990 (Reapproved 2004).
F.
ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation; 2008a.
G.
ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel; 2008.
H.
ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007.
I.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008.
J.
ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
K.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire
Protection Association; 2006.
L.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
A.
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with
minimum five (5) years of experience.
Job #09270
22 07 19 - Page 1
A.
Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
A.
Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C.
Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
D.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor
transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm-inches.
E.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
F.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
2.03 JACKETS
A.
PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
b. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
1) Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
2) Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
3) Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4) Thickness: 10 mil.
5) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
c. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
1) Compatible with insulation.
22 07 19 - Page 2
Job #09270
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D.
Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
E.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps
and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and
vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but
bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G.
For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
H.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with PVC fitting covers.
3. Finish all Domestic Water piping with PVC jacket.
I.
Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.
J.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports,
protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.
K.
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor):
Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
Job #09270
22 07 19 - Page 3
3.03 SCHEDULES
Piping System Type
Domestic Water
Domestic Hot Water
and Hot Water Return
A.
Fluid Temp
Range
40-70 F
Insulation Thickness For Pipe Sizes
(inches)
To 1"
.5
.75
1-1/4"-2"
1.0
1.0
2-1/2"-4"
1.0
1.0
5"-6"
1.0
1.0
8" & up
1.0
1.5
Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return
a. Glass Fiber Insulation
2. Domestic Cold Water
a. Glass Fiber Insulation
END OF SECTION
22 07 19 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 22 10 05
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
A.
B.
C.
Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D.
Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
A.
ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot
Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004).
B.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18).
C.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).
D.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
E.
ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.
F.
ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002.
G.
ASTM B 68 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed; 2002.
H.
ASTM B 75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2002.
I.
ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.
J.
ASTM B 306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2002.
K.
ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled
Inside Diameter; 2003.
L.
ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on
Outside Diameter; 2003.
M. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40;
2006.
N.
ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems; 2004.
O.
ASTM D 2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe; 2002.
P.
ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe
and Fittings; 2004a.
Q.
ASTM D 2683 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2004.
Job #09270
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 1
R.
ASTM D 2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2003.
S.
ASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2005.
T.
ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe
and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2002).
U.
ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2004a.
V.
ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2002.
W. ASTM F 1281 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Crosslinked Polyethylene
(PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe; 2005.
X.
AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water
Works Association; 2000 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
Y.
AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association;
2002 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
Z.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651).
AA. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2004.
AB. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2006.
AC. MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of
the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2005a.
AD. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
AE. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2002.
AF. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
A.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan, standards.
1. Maintain one copy on project site.
B.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations.
D.
Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
E.
Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water
certification, water pressure rating.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan plumbing code.
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 2
Job #09270
B.
Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
C.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of
backflow prevention devices.
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2.02 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A.
Unions for Pipe Sizes two (2) inch and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B.
Flanges for Pipe Size Over two (2) inch:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene
gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
C.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.
7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
B.
Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
5. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Job #09270
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 3
6.
C.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
Shields
1. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over insulation in
180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
2. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering
protective saddles.
3. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in
90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
2.05 GATE VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com.
2. Crane Company: www.cranevalve.com.
3. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
5. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
6. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
7. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.
B.
Up To and Including two (2) inches:
1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge
disc, solder ends.
C.
2 Inches and Larger:
1. MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc,
flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above
floor.
2.06 BALL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
2. Crane Company:Nibco, Inc: www.cranevalve.com.
3. Hammond Valve Company: www.hammondvalve.com.
5. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellerwaterproducts.com.
B.
Construction, two (2) inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated
brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing
stops, solder ends with union.
C.
Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle,
flanged or grooved ends.
2.07 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATINGS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for 125 minimum psig working pressure and 450 degrees F.
B.
Valves for fire protection suitable for 175 psig working pressure.
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 4
Job #09270
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
D.
Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Use ball valves or code approved balancing valves in water systems for throttling service.
G.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19.
H.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one
coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J.
Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to
Section 09 90 00.
K.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
L.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
M. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.
N.
Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
O.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
P.
Pipe
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Hangers and Supports:
Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal
piping.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to Section 22 05 48.
Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B.
Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
C.
Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
Job #09270
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 5
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain
at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.
B.
Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B.
Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid
(hydrochloric).
C.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80
mg/L residual.
D.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of
outlets.
E.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and
analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.06 SCHEDULES
A.
Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:
d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches:
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - Page 6
Job #09270
SECTION 22 10 06
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Cleanouts.
A.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
A.
with not less than three years documented experience.
A.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANOUTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2. Josam Company: www.josam.com.
3. Wade, Division of Tyler Pipe: www.wadedrains.com.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
B.
Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas:
1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
C.
Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
D.
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas:
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and
round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor
finish in finished floor areas.
E.
Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless
steel access cover secured with machine screw.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C.
Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
Job #09270
22 10 06 - Page 1
D.
Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each
washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long.
END OF SECTION
22 10 06 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Sinks.
A.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Preparation of counters for sinks; lavatory tops.
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.
C.
Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.
D.
Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
A.
ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and
finishes.
A.
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to
protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SINKS
A.
Sink
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturers:
Elkay Manufacturing Co: www.elkay.com.
Just Manufacturing: www.justmfg.com.
Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.
B.
Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self rimming and
undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim.
1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece.
C.
Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, vandal proof water economy aerator
with maximum flow of 0.5 gallons per minute, single lever handle.
Job #09270
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 1
D.
Accessories:
1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.
2. Wheel handle stops.
3. Flexible supplies.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B.
Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and
sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule
for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
C.
Install components level and plumb.
D.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
E.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05, color to match fixture.
F.
Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and
installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
B.
Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.
C.
Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.08 SCHEDULES
A.
Fixture Rough-In
1. Sink:
a. Hot Water: 1/2 Inch.
b. Cold Water: 1/2 Inch.
c. Waste: 1-1/2 Inch.
d. Vent: 1-1/4 Inch.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Nameplates.
B.
Tags.
C.
Stencils.
D.
Pipe Markers.
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Identification painting.
A.
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and
valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B.
Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.
C.
Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A.
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/2 inch.
3. Background Color: Green.
2.03 TAGS
A.
Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
2.04 STENCILS
A.
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters.
2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters.
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters.
4. 8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2 inch high letters.
5. Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field, 3-1/2 inch high letters.
6. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.
Job #09270
23 05 53 - Page 1
B.
Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A.
Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.
C.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive
to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B.
Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C.
Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
D.
Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic
nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
G.
Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
H.
Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
I.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
J.
Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.
K.
Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
L.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and
smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve
and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
M. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and
at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
23 05 53 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
A.
AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002.
B.
ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988, with 1997 Errata.
C.
NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National
Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.
D.
SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and
the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Submit to Design Professional.
2. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be
performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.
b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested,
adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration
date.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including:
1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).
2) Diffuser proportioning.
3) Branch/submain proportioning.
4) Total flow calculations.
5) Rechecking.
6) Diversity issues.
f.
Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:
1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all
terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations.
2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.
g. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest
possible pressures and methods to verify this.
h. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions.
i.
Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what
level (total building, zone, etc.).
j.
Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity.
k. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods.
l.
Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified.
m. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.).
Job #09270
23 05 93 - Page 1
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any.
Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified.
False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified.
Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure
differentials.
Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if specified.
Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others,
contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency).
Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency.
Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.
C.
Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and
parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect, or could affect,
the control system setup and operation.
D.
Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for
Design Professional and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
3. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing
tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and
equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
4. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.
5. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that;
otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
6. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.
7. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f.
Project Design Professional.
g. Project Engineer.
h. Project Contractor.
i.
Project altitude.
j.
Report date.
E.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and
rough setting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.
4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
5. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.
B.
Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to
Substantial Completion of the project.
23 05 93 - Page 2
Job #09270
C.
Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke
detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the
authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.
2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.
3. Certified by one of the following:
a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC
National Performance Guaranty.
b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute:
www.tabbcertified.org.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B.
Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance.
C.
Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available
to Design Professional to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B.
Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or
minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space.
Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
C.
Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:
1. Running log of events and issues.
2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.
3. Contract interpretation requests.
4. Lists of completed tests.
Job #09270
23 05 93 - Page 3
B.
Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
C.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D.
Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross
reference the location in the final report.
E.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has
been rectified.
F.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as
selected and witnessed by the Owner.
3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air
quantities at site altitude.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers
and splitters.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch
air quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total
pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K.
Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance
variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.
L.
Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required
relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm
connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature
control.
3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B.
Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates
for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature
difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
23 05 93 - Page 4
Job #09270
C.
Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to
thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air
balancing.
D.
Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.
E.
Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not
use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F.
Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in
one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.08 SCOPE
A.
Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1. Fans
2. Air Inlets and Outlets
3.09 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
A.
Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer
2. Model/Frame
3. HP/BHP
4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
5. RPM
6. Service factor
7. Starter size, rating, heater elements
8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
B.
V-Belt Drives:
1. Identification/location
2. Required driven RPM
3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
4. Belt, size and quantity
5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
C.
Heating Coils:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
6. Water flow, design and actual
7. Water pressure drop, design and actual
8. Entering water temperature, design and actual
9. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
10. Entering air temperature, design and actual
11. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
12. Air pressure drop, design and actual
D.
Air Moving Equipment:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
6. Air flow, specified and actual
Job #09270
23 05 93 - Page 5
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Return air flow, specified and actual
Outside air flow, specified and actual
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
Inlet pressure
Discharge pressure
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
Number of Belts/Make/Size
Fan RPM
E.
Return Air/Outside Air:
1. Identification/location
2. Design air flow
3. Actual air flow
4. Design return air flow
5. Actual return air flow
6. Design outside air flow
7. Actual outside air flow
8. Return air temperature
9. Outside air temperature
10. Required mixed air temperature
11. Actual mixed air temperature
12. Design outside/return air ratio
13. Actual outside/return air ratio
F.
Exhaust Fans:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Air flow, specified and actual
6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7. Inlet pressure
8. Discharge pressure
9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
10. Number of Belts/Make/Size
11. Fan RPM
G.
Terminal Unit Data:
1. Manufacturer
2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
3. Identification/number
4. Location
5. Model number
6. Size
7. Minimum static pressure
8. Minimum design air flow
9. Maximum design air flow
10. Maximum actual air flow
11. Inlet static pressure
H.
Air Distribution Tests:
1. Air terminal number
2. Room number/location
3. Terminal type
4. Terminal size
5. Area factor
6. Design velocity
7. Design air flow
23 05 93 - Page 6
Job #09270
8. Test (final) velocity
9. Test (final) air flow
10. Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
23 05 93 - Page 7
SECTION 23 07 13
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Duct insulation.
B.
Duct Liner.
C.
Insulation jackets.
A.
Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
A.
ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.
B.
ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
Applications; 2002.
C.
ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound
Absorbing Material); 2005.
D.
E.
ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
F.
G.
SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this
section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section,
with minimum 3 years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
A.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including
product density and thickness.
B.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by
storing in original wrapping.
Job #09270
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A.
Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Fiber Glass: www.knaufusa.com.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D.
Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive
rubber based adhesive.
E.
Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
2.03 JACKETS
A.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
2.04 DUCT LINER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Fiber Glass: www.knaufusa.com.
B.
Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; rigid board and preformed round liner
board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, or acrylic polymer shown to
be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21.
1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.
3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum.
4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30.
b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45.
c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60.
d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70.
C.
Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type.
D.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad, impact applied, or welded with integral, or press-on
head.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and
expansion joints.
D.
Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
E.
External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape
to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to
prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without
disturbing wrapping.
F.
Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow
for insulation thickness.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Supply Air Ducts: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation.
1. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
B.
Return Ducts: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation Liner.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - Page 3
SECTION 23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Piping insulation.
B.
Jackets and accessories.
A.
B.
Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
A.
ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004.
B.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007.
C.
ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007.
D.
ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel; 2008.
E.
F.
G.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
A.
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with
minimum 5 years of experience.
A.
Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
A.
Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
Job #09270
23 07 19 - Page 1
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
C.
Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
D.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor
transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches.
E.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
F.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
G.
Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D.
For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
E.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F.
Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.
23 07 19 - Page 2
Job #09270
G.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports,
protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.
3.03 SCHEDULE
A.
Heating Systems:
1. Steam and Condensate Piping:
a. Thickness: One (1) inch glass fiber.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
23 07 19 - Page 3
SECTION 23 09 01
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section
B.
Related Sections
C.
Description
D.
Approved Control System Contractor
E.
Quality Assurance
F.
System Performance
G.
Submittals
H.
Warranty
I.
Ownership of Proprietary Material
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A.
Control Valves
B.
Flow Switches
C.
Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
D.
Pressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
E.
Automatic Dampers
F.
Terminal Unit Controls
G.
Pressure Transmitters
H.
Temperature Transmitters
I.
Power Transmitters
J.
Thermostats
K.
Sensors
L.
Controllers
M. Smoke Detectors
A.
The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements are a part of
these Specifications and shall be used in conjunction with this Section as a part of the Contract
Documents. Consult them for further instructions pertaining to this work. The Contractor is bound by the
provisions of Division 0 and Division 1.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A.
General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications.
B.
Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of
mechanical systems on this project.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 1
C.
The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control
system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid
system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any work-station on the control system and have access
to all appropriate data.
D.
The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under
stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other
controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control.
E.
Communication between the control panels and all work-stations shall be over a high speed network. All
nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to
view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network
controllers to update point information and alarm information.
F.
The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary
to implement the functions and sequences shown.
1.05 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTOR
A.
Approved Control System Contractor:
1. Johnson Controls Corporate Branch Only - Contact Dave Lintner at 989-245-6103 for scope/pricing.
2. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall interface with the existing JCI system and supply all necessary control
devices including VAV boxes, controllers and any required VFD's.
3. No other Bidders are approved.
a. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes, except when
more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents, including
requirements of this Section.
1) Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.
2) National Electrical Code -- NFPA 70.
3) Federal Communications Commission -- Part J.
4) ASHRAE/ANSI 135-1995 (BACnet)
b. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be
applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years.
c. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved
by the Owner's representative in writing prior to bid date.
d. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.
1.06 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following:
1. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of 20 dynamic points. All current
data shall be displayed within 20 seconds seconds of the request.
2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within 30 seconds.
3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and
the reaction by the device shall be 10 seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within 10 seconds.
4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the
high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or work-station will be current,
within the prior 60 seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is
annunciated at the work-station shall not exceed 45 seconds.
6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often
as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent
with the mechanical process under control.
7. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a
selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and update the
process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.
8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All work-stations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of
each other.
23 09 01 - Page 2
Job #09270
9.
Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values reported by
the specified system.
10. Table I -- Reporting Accuracy
Space temperature
±0.5 C (±1 F)
Ducted air
±1.0 C (±2 F)
Outside air
±1.0 C (±2 F)
Water temperature
±0.5 C (±1 F)
Delta-T
±0.15 C (±0.25 F)
Relative humidity
±5% RH
Water flow
±5% of full scale
Air flow (terminal)
±10% of reading (Not
Air flow (measuring station
±5% of reading
Air pressure (ducts)
±25 Pa (±0.1" w.g.)
Air pressure (space)
±3 Pa (±0.01" w.g.)
Water pressure
±2% full scale (Note
Electrical power
5% of reading (Note
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
±50 PPM
Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
±50 PPM
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data sheets on all
hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals
have been reviewed by the Engineer and Owner for conformity with the plan and specifications. Six (6)
copies are required.
C.
Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve
the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.
D.
Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to
determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to
be installed.
E.
Submit the following within 60 days of contract award:
1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model
number.
2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and
connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location.
3. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer
and model number.
4. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets
apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project
shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and
drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted
to cover. Include:
a. Building Controllers
b. Custom Application Controllers
c. Application Specific Controllers
d. Operator Interface Computer
e. Portable Operator Workstation
f.
Auxiliary Control Devices
g. Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations,
addresses, and cabling.
h. Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory termination's. Terminal
numbers shall be clearly labeled.
i.
Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 3
j.
k.
F.
Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific for the
use of the Control System being provided for this project.
Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display.
Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (as-built)
documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include:
1. Project Record Drawings - These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of
magnetic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided.
2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists.
3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual - These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product
data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual shall include:
a. Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the
control systems and service representative of each.
b. Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm
handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set
points and other variables.
c. Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement
descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification,
program creation and modification, and use of the editor.
d. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new
points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to
debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
e. A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language
including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and
database shall also be provided.
f.
One set of magnetic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the project.
g. A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and supplier.
h. Complete original issue documentation, installation and maintenance information for all third party
hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors.
i.
Complete original issue diskettes for all software provided including operating systems,
programming language, operator work-station software, and graphics software.
j.
Licenses, Guarantee, and Warrantee documents for all equipment and systems.
k. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a
schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks, and task
descriptions.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
Warrant all work as follows:
1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of
twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the
warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the
Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours
during customary business hours.
2. Operator work-station software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates
shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by
Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes.
1.09 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
A.
All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are
not limited to:
1. Project graphic images
2. Record drawings
3. Project database
4. Job-specific application programming code
5. All documentation.
23 09 01 - Page 4
Job #09270
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A.
Johnson Controls Inc.
1. When a product or component is referred to by Manufacturers name and/or model number, the
Contractor shall use only that product.
2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR CONTROLS
A.
Complying with the principle of "unit responsibility" all electrical work for automatic controls, except as
otherwise specified, or shown on the electrical drawings shall be included in Division 26.
B.
Electrical work shall, in general, comply with the following:
1. All low voltage wiring in finished rooms shall be concealed below working heights and exposed above
the ceiling.
2. Electrical work may include both line voltage and low voltage wiring, as required, to complete
electronic control circuit from the circuit breaker in the electrical distribution panel.
3. Connect a maximum of six (6) VAV boxes on one 120 volt circuit, and identify in a permanent manner
the panel and circuit number serving each box. Refer to VAV box schedule on drawings.
4. Conduit network for power systems may be used for running control high voltage wiring.
5. All electrical work shall comply with the N.E.C. and local electrical codes.
6. All safety devices shall be wired through both hand and auto positions of motor starting device to
insure 100% safety shut-off.
7. All magnetic starters furnished by Electrical Contractor for mechanical equipment shall be furnished
with integral 120 volt control transformers, sized to handle the additional VA needed for the controls pilots, EP valves, etc.
8. The motor starter supplier shall provide auxiliary contacts as required for interlock by FMS Contractor.
The supplier shall estimate an allowance of at least one auxiliary contract per starter. All interlock and
control wiring shown on the electrical prints is by the electrical subcontractor.
9. Electrical contractor shall install outlet boxes and conduit for temperature control sensors in finished
areas only. Conduit shall extend up to ceiling space of accessible ceilings in finished areas.
Coordinate exact box and trim ring configuration with electrical trade to neatly accept temperature
sensors.
10. Conduit shall be run by Temperature Control Trade in Mechanical rooms or other unfinished areas,
surface mounted as required for all temperature control work.
11. Low voltage plenum rated wiring can be run exposed above working heights in equipment rooms and
above accessible ceiling. Wiring shall be neatly tied to pipes, EMT or other devices and not laid on
ceiling tile.
C.
DDC System Multi-conductor Instrumentation and Communication Cabling
1. Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Input, Binary Output, 24 VAC and General Purpose Cabling
a. Cable shall consist of copper conductors not less No. 18 AWG-stranded.
b. Shall be 2 or 3 conductor twisted cable with a drain wire.
c. Cable shall have a 100% overall shield.
d. Cable shall be a plenum-rated.
e. Cable shall meet or exceed NEC voltage rating of 300V.
f.
Cable shall be NEC type CMP.
g. Cable shall meet or exceed UL temperature rating of +60 degrees C.
h. Cable shall be labeled at a minimum of every 18” with the DDC System manufacturer's name and
the type of signal carried within the cable, i.e. Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Input, Binary
Output, 24 VAC.
i.
Each of the cable types specified in Item A shall have easy identification and troubleshooting.
2. Primary and Secondary Communications Network Cabling
a. Cable shall be of type recommend by the DDC System Manufacturer.
b. Cable shall be shielded.
c. Cable shall be a plenum-rated.
d. Cable shall meet or exceed NEC voltage rating of 150V.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 5
e.
f.
3.
Cable shall meet or exceed UL temperature rating of +60 degrees C.
Cable shall be labeled at a minimum of every 18” with the DDC System manufacturer's name,
system name and the communications network name.
g. Each of the cable types shall be of a different color coding for easy identification and trouble
shooting and shall be of a different color than the cable specified in Item A above.
Room Sensor Cabling
a. Cable shall consist of copper conductors not less No. 24 AWG.
b. Shall be multi-paired (at least two pairs) twisted cable.
c. Cable shall have a 100% overall shield.
d. Cable shall be a plenum-rated.
e. Cable shall meet or exceed NEC voltage rating of 300V.
f.
Cable shall be NEC type Article 800-CMP.
g. Cable shall meet or exceed UL temperature rating of +75 degrees C.
h. Cable shall be labeled at a minimum of every 18” with the DDC System manufacturer's name and
labeled as stat cable.
D.
DRAWINGS AND LAYOUTS
1. The FMS manufacturer shall submit description of operation and schematic drawings of the System to
the Engineer for approval before starting work. At least six sets of submittals shall be sent through
channels. At least four sets of operator and maintenance manuals with "as built" drawings, parts lists,
etc., shall be provided at job completion.
E.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES
1. The control system shall include all necessary and specified control equipment properly installed in
accordance with specifications and drawings, and shall include the automatic control of the following:
2. Control Dampers: Dampers required in the temperature and smoke control functions of the automatic
control system shall be factory fabricated and shall be manufactured by the FMS Systems
Manufacturer. All dampers shall be sized as shown on drawings or as specified. All damper frames
shall be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet metal or extruded aluminum of 12 gauge thickness,
and shall have a flange or duct mounting. The blades shall be parallel or opposed, as required, and
suitable for the air velocities to be encountered in the system. Replaceable Butyl rubber seals are to
be provided on damper blades and installed along with the top and bottom of the frame. Stainless steel
damper blades and seals shall be installed inside the frame sides. Seals and bearings shall be able to
withstand temperatures ranging from minus 40 degrees F to plus 200 degrees F. Dampers shall be
leak rated for 3 CFM/per square foot at 1" WG and 20 CFM/per square foot. squared at 4" WG or less
in full closed position at 4" WG pressure differential across damper. All smoke control dampers must
conform to UL555S and be Ruskin SD-60 or Johnson Control SD-1300.
3. Damper blades shall not exceed 6" in width or 48” in length. Longer units shall be fabricated in
sections. All blades are to be corrugated type construction, fabricated from two sheets of #22 gauge
galvanized sheet steel, spot welded together. Blades are to be suitable for high velocity performance.
Dampers shall be similar to Ruskin CD-60 or Johnson Controls D-1300.
4. Control Valves: Valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer to produce the required capacity at
a pressure loss not exceeding the allowable pressure drop indicated on the drawing. Nominal body
rating shall be not less than 125 PSI. However, the valve body and packing selected shall be sized to
withstand the system static head plus the maximum pump head and the maximum temperature of the
control medium, chilled water, steam, and/or hot water. Two-way modulating valves shall have
close-off ratings exceeding the maximum pressure difference, at any load condition, between the outlet
and inlet. Each valve shall be equipped with proper packing to assure there will be no leakage at the
valve stem. All control valves shall be motor operated closed, spring driven open.
5. Operators: A damper or valve operator shall be electric and be provided for each automatic damper or
valve and shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the damper or valve under all conditions and to
guarantee tight close-off of valves, as specified, against system pressure encountered. Damper and
valve operators are to be made out of diecast metal; no plastic or sheet metal bodies will be allowed.
6. Sensors and Controllers:
a. Differential Pressure Switch for water shall have a single-pole, single-throw (SPST) contact,
adjustable setpoint, UL rated 6 amperes at 120 volts, 100 psig design, and shall be Johnson
Controls P74 Series with automatic reset, or equal. Each switch shall be provided with isolation
23 09 01 - Page 6
Job #09270
and drain valves.
Differential Pressure Switch for air shall have a single-pole, single-throw (SPST) contact,
adjustable setpoint, UL rated 9.8 amperes at 120 volts, and shall be Johnson Controls P32 Series
or equal.
c. Low Limit Thermostats shall be of manual reset type, with setpoint adjustment. The sensing
element shall be 20 foot minimum and shall be installed completely across the coil. When any
one foot of the element senses a temperature as low as the setpoint, the thermostat contacts
shall open. These shall contain double pole switches for simultaneous remote alarms or as
desired. Thermostat shall be Johnson Controls A70 or equal.
d. Duct Type Temperature Transmitter shall be a general purpose RTD sensing element, moisture
resistant transmitter for mounting into a duct. The operating range shall be as indicated with an
accuracy of + 1% over the full range. The output shall be compatible with the panel it serves.
e. Duct Averaging Type Temperature Transmitter shall be a general purpose RTD sensing element,
moisture resistant transmitter for mounting into a duct. The operating range shall be as indicated
with an accuracy of + 1% over the full range. The output shall be compatible with the panel it
serves. Transmitter shall be with 17 feet of sensor capillary.
f.
Space Temperature Transmitter shall contain an RTD sensing element to monitor room air
temperatures in the range of 30 degrees F to 90 degrees F, unless indicated otherwise. The
transmitter shall be factory calibrated to an accuracy of + 1%. The assembly shall be installed
within a metal ventilated enclosure suitable for wall mounting. The output shall be an compatible
with the panel it serves. Transmitter shall be factory calibrated to an accuracy of + 1% over the
full range. Transmitter shall have an adjustable temperature wheel, override/reset button and
cancel button.
g. Pipe Temperature Transmitter shall contain an RTD sensing element to monitor water
temperature. The Contractor shall provide brass wells of sufficient size for the pipe to be
installed. The output shall be compatible with the panel it serves. Transmitter shall be factory
calibrated to an accuracy of + 1% over the full range.
h. Outdoor Air Temperature Transmitter shall contain an RTD sensing element mounting in an
enclosure rated for outdoor use. The output shall be compatible with the panel it serves.
Transmitter shall be factory calibrated to an accuracy of + 1% over the full range.
i.
Humidity Transmitter Duct shall be capable of providing continuous measurement of percent
relative humidity with an accuracy of + 4% over the range of 10 to 80% RH. The output shall be
proportional VDC over a cable pair.
j.
Humidity Transmitter Outside Air shall be capable of providing continuous measurement of
percent relative humidity with an accuracy of + 2% over the range 20 to 90% RH. The output
shall be a 4 to 20 Ma signal over a shielded cable pair. Transmitter shall have outside weather
enclosure. Transmitter shall be General Eastern RH-2 or equal.
k. Humidity Transmitter Space shall be capable of providing continuous measurement of percent
relative humidity with an accuracy of + 3% over the range of 20 to 60% RH. The output shall be
proportional VDC over a cable pair.
l.
Pressure Transducer shall be for steam service and have a stainless steel sensor. The device
shall output a 4-20 mA signal which is linear in relation to the sensed pressure. Accuracy shall be
+ .05% of the full scale. Power shall be from the controller and range from 22-26 volts DC. The
unit shall have temperature compensation so that thermal effects are no more than + .05% of the
full scale from 0-175 DEGF. The unit shall be suitable for the media and pressure measured.
m. Differential Pressure Transducer shall be for air or water service. The device shall output a 4-20
mA signal which is linear in relation to the sensed pressure. Accuracy shall be + .01% of full
scale. The power shall be from the controller and shall be in the range of 22-26 volts DC. The unit
shall have temperature compensation so that thermal effects are no more than + .05% of the full
scale from 32-100 degrees F. The transducer shall be suitable for the media and pressure
measured.
n. Smoke Detectors shall be ionization type for duct installation with supply and return sampling
tubes. Detector shall be UL listed with housing, relays for air handling unit stop and remote
alarm. Duct mounted smoke detector shall be BRK Model DH1851AC or equal with duct
sampling tube to match duct work, 120 volt, 60 hertz, single-phase power source, reset switch,
two SPST contacts rated for 125 V AC and 3 amp, and local indicator light.
b.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 7
o.
Sensors, thermostats and humidistats at locations that receive rough use and other locations as
designated by Architect/Engineer, shall have protective covers.
2.03 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A.
The Facility Management System (FMS) shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions, including
equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and trend data collection.
B.
The FMS shall consist of the following:
- Utilization of Existing Operator Workstation
- Utilization of Existing Network Control Panel (Expanded if necessary to accommodate additional point
capacity)
- Standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs)
- Portable Remote Access Operator Zone Terminal
- Dial up troubleshooting support communications capability
C.
The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality
through the addition of sensors, actuators, ASCs, and operator devices.
D.
The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control
strategies at other operational devices.
E.
All newly installed system components and software shall be Y2K compliant and have been previously
tested as such.
2.04 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS
A.
General: The design of the FMS shall be networked as shown on the attached system configuration
drawing. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a
local network, auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or a combination of the two networking
schemes.
2.05 LOCAL NETWORK
A.
Panel Support: The Network Control Panel shall directly oversee a local network such that communications
may be executed directly to and between ASCs.
B.
Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the
ability to access all point status and application data on the network. Access to system data shall not be
restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system.
C.
Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or Global Point Broadcasting shall allow point data to be shared
between ASCs when it would be inefficient or impractical to locate multiple sensors.
D.
General Network Design: The network minimum baud rate shall be 9600 baud, supporting a minimum of
100 ASCs. The network shall detect single or multiple failures of ASCs or the network media. The network
shall be composed of commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components operating an industry
standard protocol, such as Optomux, and IEEE RS-485 communications interface.
2.06 OPERATOR WORKSTATION
A.
Personal Computer: The existing Personal Computer shall be utilized for command entry, information
management, network alarm management, and data base management functions.
2.07 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A.
Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator interface software shall minimize operator training
through the use of English language prompting and English language point identification. The operator
interface shall also have the option of using a mouse or similar pointing device for a "point and click"
approach to facilities management.
B.
Text-Based Displays: The operator interface shall provide consistent text-based displays of all system
point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status
23 09 01 - Page 8
Job #09270
indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices.
C.
Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the
user/manager to limit control, display, and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for
each user, based upon an assigned password.
1. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices.
2. A minimum of four (4) levels of access shall be supported.
3. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu
selections displayed at any operator device shall be limited to only those items defined for the access
level of the password used to log-on.
4. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators
from inadvertently leaving devices logged on.
D.
Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but
not limited to, the following:
- Start-up or shutdown selected equipment
- Adjust setpoints
- Add/Modify/Delete time programming
- Enable/Disable process execution
- Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point
- Enable/Disable Totalization for each point
- Enable/Disable Trending
- Enter temporary override schedules
- Define Holiday Schedules
- Change time/date
- Enter/Modify analog alarm limits
- Enable/Disable demand limiting
- Enable/Disable duty cycle
- Enable/Disable average/high/low signal select and reset
E.
Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated manually, and directed to the displays. As a minimum,
the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:
F.
A general listing of all points in the system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
- Points currently in alarm
- Off-line points
- Points currently in override status
- Points in Weekly Schedules
- Holiday Programming
G.
Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of
groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility
management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware
controller to obtain system information.
H.
System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy
management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures
shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.
1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an
operator to independently perform the following functions:
- Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers
- Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants
- Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point
- Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications
- Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based programming
- Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point
- Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point
- Add/Delete/Modify configured control processes
- Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 9
- Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords
- Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages
I.
Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, ASCs, individual points,
applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the-blank templates.
J.
Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single
ASC, but shall be able to include data from any and all other ASCs to allow the development of
network-wide control strategies.
K.
System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be
self-documenting to provide hard copy printouts of all configuration and application data.
L.
Data base Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all ASC and Digital Panel data bases shall be stored
in at least one personal computer or laptop. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute
downloads of an ASC or Digital Panel data base.
2.08 NETWORK CONTROL PANELS
A.
General: Network Control Panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, digital control
processors.
B.
Each Network Control Panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data
bases including:
- Control Processes
- Energy Management Applications
- Alarm Management
- Trend Data
- Maintenance Support Applications
- Operator I/O
- Dial-Up Communications
- Manual Override Monitoring
C.
Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition
of field controllers, sensors, and actuators.
D.
Serial Communication Ports: Network Control Panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data
communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices, such as laptop computers,
Personal Computers, and Video Display terminals.
E.
Hardware Override Monitoring: Network Control Panels shall monitor the status of all overrides, and include
this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited.
F.
Integrated On-line Diagnostics: Each Network Control Panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. Master Digital Panels shall provide
both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish
communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each Network Control Panel.
G.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network termination's, as well as all field
point termination's, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980.
Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high
voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.
H.
Power-fail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the
Network Control Panel to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non-volatile memory
shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to
support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal
power, the Network Control Panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
Should Network Control Panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading
the Network Control Panel via the local RS-232C port.
2.09 DDC CONTROLLERS
23 09 01 - Page 10
Job #09270
A.
General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital
control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed
processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of
controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.
B.
Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases
including:
-Control processes
-Energy Management Applications
-Alarm Management
-Historical/Trend Data for all points
-Custom Processes
-Manual Override Monitoring
C.
Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
-Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
-Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control
-Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements
-Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment
D.
Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data
communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard
printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator's
Terminals
E.
Hardware Override Switches: The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally
executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override
switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override
switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.
F.
Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and include
this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited.
DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.
G.
Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary input and
output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
H.
Integrated on-line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local
and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish
communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be
provided at each DDC panel, and shall not
require the connection of an operator I/O device.
I.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network termination, as well as all field
point termination's to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980.
J.
Power-fail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all
standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-Volatile memory
shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to
support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without
manual intervention.
2. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel will automatically receive a download via
the local area network, phone lines, or connected computer. In addition, the user shall have the
capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS-232C port, or via
telephone line dial-in.
K.
SOFTWARE FEATURES
1. Control Software Description:
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 11
a.
2.
3.
Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following
pre-tested control algorithms:
1) Two Position Control
2) Proportional Control
3) Proportional plus Integral Control
4) Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
5) Automatic Control Loop Tuning
b. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number
of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within an one-hour period.
c. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand
situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive
start commands to heavy electrical loads.
d. Power-fail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the
status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn
equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
Energy Management Applications:
a. DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management
routines:
- Time of Day Scheduling
- Calendar Based Scheduling
- Holiday Scheduling
- Temporary Schedule Overrides
- Optimal Start
- Optimal Stop
- Night Setback Control
- Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer)
- Peak Demand Limiting
- Temperature Compensated Load Rolling
- Fan Speed/CFM Control
- Heating/Cooling Interlock
- Cold Deck Reset
- Hot Deck Reset
- Hot Water Reset
- Chilled Water Reset
- Condenser Water Reset
- Chiller Sequencing
b. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall
be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied to building
equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification.
Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job-specific
processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.
a. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:
-Any system-measured point data or status
-Any calculated data
-Any results from other processes
-User-Defined Constants
-Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exponential, etc.)
-Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
-On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
b. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
-Time interval
-Time of day
-Date
-Other processes
23 09 01 - Page 12
Job #09270
4.
5.
-Time programming
-Events (e.g., point alarms)
c. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data
from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall
be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
d. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and
advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a
specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up
connection to a remote device such as a printer.
e. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be
self-documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical
flowcharts and English language descriptors.
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports
to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm
analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network
traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be
affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with
other panels on the network.
a. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's
English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
b. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to
critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall
automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users
shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able
to define under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or
sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date.
c. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined list of
operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be
automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line.
d. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be
able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm
condition or direct operator response. Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing a
library of at least 250 Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of
points in the panel.
e. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a
remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping and
saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or until the buffer space is full.
The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
f.
Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically logged to
disk in Personal Computer industry standard database format. Operator commands initiated from
Direct-connected workstations, dial-up workstations, and local DDC panel Network Terminal
devices shall all be logged to this transaction file. This data shall be available at the Operator
Workstation. A utility shall be provided to allow the user to search the transaction file using
standard database query techniques, including searching by dates, operator name, data point
name, etc. In addition, this transaction file shall be accessible with standard third party database
and spreadsheet packages.
Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to
automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways:
a. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store Point History Files for all analog
and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically
sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored
for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all
problem-related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and
analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or
commands for each point.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 13
b.
6.
Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide high resolution
sampling capability in one-second increments for verification of control loop performance.
c. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be
assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance
data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours shall be provided.
Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of
storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.
d. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels, and
uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either
user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data
shall be available in disk file format compatible with Third Party personal computer applications.
Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours
for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.
a. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
b. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique,
user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.10 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A.
Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of
remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).
B.
Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a
microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
C.
Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including:
-Control Processes
-Energy Management Applications
-Operator I/O
D.
The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network-resident PC
workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network.
E.
Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the use of a portable terminal. The capabilities of the
portable terminal shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Display temperatures
2. Display status
3. Display setpoints
4. Display control parameters
5. Override binary output control
6. Override analog setpoints
7. Modification of gain and offset constants
F.
Power-fail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other
programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate
reprogramming the controller.
G.
Configuration and Download: The ASCs shall have the capability of receiving configuration and program
loading by both of the following: 1) locally, via a direct connect portable laptop service tool, 2) over the
network, from the portable laptop service tool, and; 3) from the
Operator Workstation, via the
communication networks.
H.
Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Application Specific Controllers shall have the capability to
automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to
quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two
samples per hour shall be stored.
I.
HVAC Application Descriptions:
23 09 01 - Page 14
Job #09270
1.
2.
Unitary Controllers:
a. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems to address
specific applications described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future
expansion:
- Unit Vents (ASHRAE Cycle I, II, III, or IV)
- Heat Pumps (Air-to-Air, Water-to-Air)
- Packaged Rooftops
- Fan Coils (Two-Pipe, Four-Pipe)
b. Unitary Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
- Economizer Switch Over Inputs
Drybulb
Outdoor Air Enthalpy
Differential Temperature
Binary Input from a separate controller
- Economizer Outputs
Integrated Analog with minimum position
Binary output to enable self-contained economizer actuator
- Heating and Cooling Outputs
1 to 3 Stages
Analog Output with two-pipe logic
Reversing valve logic for Heat Pumps
- Fan Output
On/Off Logic Control
c. Unitary controllers shall support the following library of control strategies to address the
requirements of the sequences described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for
future expansion:
- Daily/Weekly Schedules
- Comfort/Occupancy Mode
- Economy Mode
Standby Mode/Economizer Available
Unoccupied/Economizer Not Available
Shutdown
Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode
- Temporary Override Mode
Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Based Control)
Boost (Occupant Warmer/Cooler Control)
d. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each Unitary Controller shall have a provision
for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or
an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall automatically select either Standby or
Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort
conditions.
e. Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary
output to serve as the interface to an associated lighting relay. Based upon the status of either an
occupancy sensing device, or manual wall switch, the Unitary Controller shall provide a contact
output to automatically adjust the lighting level to accommodate occupant requirements while
reducing electrical consumption. Standby/Comfort (described in the previous section) and Lighting
overrides shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
f.
Alarm Management: Each Unitary Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and
analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
AHU Controllers
a. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to
address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for
future expansion:
- Large Air Handling Units
Mixed Air-Single Path
Mixed Air-Dual Path
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 15
3.
100% Single Path
100% Dual Path
b. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified
control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
c. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence
of operation as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.
d. Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status
of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall
automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling
requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.
e. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and
analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
HVAC Application Specific Controller Configuration
a. a. The Application Specific Controllers shall be configured using an intuitive, easy-to-use
configuration tool. Standard, pre-tested, HVAC applications will be "built-in" the tool. It is the
intent that a nonprogrammer, fluent with HVAC systems, and not necessarily with computer
programming, be capable of
using the configuration tool with minimal training.
b. b. The tool will utilize a question and answer format to aid the user in configuration. The tool will
automatically query the user for desired operational characteristics, along with desired fail-safe
and fault condition configurations, in order to assure proper HVAC system operation and
protection.
c. c. Systems that require free-form programming will not be acceptable.
2.11 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A.
General
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system, as described in this specification, shall
be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the Network
Control Panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
B.
Control Software Description
1. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of
times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
2. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations
during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands
to heavy electrical loads.
3. Power-fail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the
status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment
on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
C.
Network Control Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management
routines:
- Time of Day Scheduling
- Calendar Based Scheduling
- Holiday Scheduling
- Optimal Start
- Optimal Stop
- Demand Limiting
- Load Rolling
- Heating/Cooling Interlock
- Average/High/Low Signal Select and Reset
D.
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible
enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment described in the
"Sequence of Operation" portion of this specification.
E.
Programming Capability: Network Control Panels shall be able to execute configured processes defined by
the user to automatically perform calculations and control routines.
23 09 01 - Page 16
Job #09270
1.
2.
3.
It shall be possible to use any of the following in a configured process:
- Any system-measured point data or status
- Any calculated data
- Any results from other processes
- Boolean logic operators (and, or)
Configured processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:
- Time of day
- Calendar Date
- Other process
- Events (e.g., point alarms)
Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and
all other ASCs. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all
other ASCs on the local network.
F.
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to
operator devices and memory files. Each Network Control Panel shall perform distributed, independent
alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network
traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the Digital Panel's ability to report alarms be
affected by either operator activity at the local I/O device, or communications with other ASCs on the
network.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English
language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritizing: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall
be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A
minimum of four (4) priority levels shall be provided. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit
alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define conditions under which point
changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged for analysis at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator device.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to
print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct
operator response. Each Network Control Panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 100
Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel.
5. Remote Alarm Horn: Each Network Control Panel shall be capable of triggering a binary output on an
ASC when a critical or network alarm is received. The alarm horn feature shall be silenced when the
critical alarm is acknowledged.
G.
Trend Analysis: A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, assignable to
user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended
periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 24 hours, in one-minute or one-hour intervals, shall be
provided. Each Network Control Panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of
storing 32 trend logs. Each trend log shall have up to 4 points trended at 168 data samples each. Data
shall be stored at the Network Control Panel.
H.
Runtime Totalization: Network Control Panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for
binary input and output points specified in the "Sequence of Operation" portion of this specification.
1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique,
user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
I.
Pulse Totalization: Network Control Panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption
totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected binary pulse input-type points.
1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage accumulations of up to 9,999,999 units (e.g. KWH,
gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.).
2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute.
3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be
generated when the limit is reached.
4. The information available from the Pulse Totalization shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
- Peak Demand, with date and time stamp
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 17
- 24-hour Demand Log
- Accumulated KWH for day
- Sunday through Saturday KWH usage
- Sunday through Saturday Demand KW
- Demand KW annual history for past 12 periods
- KWH annual history for past 12 periods
J.
Event Totalization: Network Control Panels shall have the ability to count events, such as the number of
times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off.
1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of
9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be
generated when the limit is reached.
2.12 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A.
The system shall be able to communicate by using a PC with a color graphics software package provided
by the Temperature Control Contractor. This software shall utilize a color graphic representation of each
piece of equipment specified to allow for complete monitoring and modification capabilities. The software
shall also be customized for this particular project, as part of the temperature control contractors base bid,
by utilizing an icon-based system to link the various color screens to one another. The temperature control
contractor shall provide all the necessary communication converters, cabling, and connectors necessary to
interface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before
rough-in work is started.
B.
The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is
started.
3.02 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
A.
Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to
walls) wherever possible.
B.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
C.
Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC.
Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically
designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.
D.
Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
23 09 01 - Page 18
Job #09270
E.
All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for
performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard
practices.
3.03 WIRING METHODS
A.
All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 16 of
these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 16, the
requirements of this section shall take precedence.
B.
Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums,
approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:
1. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be
sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)
2. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e. cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed
specifically for that purpose.
C.
Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage
may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and
transformers).
D.
Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and
bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m (10 ft) intervals. Such bundled cable shall be
fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m (5 ft) intervals or more often to achieve a neat
and workmanlike result.
E.
All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire
connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be
neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.
F.
Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the
Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.
G.
All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only
within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.
H.
Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all
penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.
I.
Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System
Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.
J.
Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only These relays may also be located
within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1
starter enclosures.
K.
Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or
communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.
L.
Adhere to Division 26 requirements for installation of raceway.
M. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring
diagrams with termination's identified at the job site.
N.
Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be
supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In
areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be
used.
O.
Cable wiring labeling shall conform to input and output points.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 19
3.04 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
A.
Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.
C.
Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall
framing.
D.
All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from
other areas affecting sensor readings.
E.
Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.
F.
Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors
shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a
capillary clip.
G.
All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with
heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.
H.
Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical
and service rooms.
I.
Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location.
3.05 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION
A.
Install using a thread-o-let in steel pipe. In copper pipe use C x C x F Tee, no pipe extensions or
substitutions allowed.
B.
Mount a minimum of 5 pipe diameters up stream and 5 pipe diameters downstream or 2 feet which ever is
greater, from fittings and other obstructions.
C.
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
D.
Assure correct flow direction and alignment.
E.
Mount in horizontal piping - flow switch on top of the pipe.
3.06 ACTUATORS
A.
Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.
B.
To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to
approximately 5ø open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.
C.
Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly
throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.
D.
Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer.
Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.
3.07 WARNING LABELS
A.
Affix plastic labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the Control System.
Label shall indicate the following: "C A U T I O N This equipment is operating under automatic control and
may start at any time without warning."
3.08 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING
A.
All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2"
of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.
B.
Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.
23 09 01 - Page 20
Job #09270
C.
Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.
D.
Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All
plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.
3.09 CONTROLLERS
A.
Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. Points used for control loop reset
such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement.
B.
Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of 10%
spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, 10% of
each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 10% of each type is required. A minimum of one spare
is required for each type of point used.
C.
Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, point database definition,
and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use
of these spare points.
3.10 PROGRAMMING
A.
Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a
minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use.
B.
Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the
use of a written point index.
C.
Software Programming
1. Provide programming for the system as per specifications and adhere to the strategy algorithms
provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in
this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into the control
program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The
comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.
D.
Operators' Interface
1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in the building.
These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the points list.
2. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and
trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This
includes any operating system software, the operator interface data base, and any third party software
installation and integration required for successful operation of the existing operator interface.
3.11 CLEANING
A.
This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove
all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste
shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor.
B.
At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making
it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.
C.
At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage,
and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any
metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to
match the adjacent areas.
3.12 PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be
liable for all damage thus caused.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 21
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and
accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store
material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all
open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of
foreign objects.
A.
All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and
federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.
B.
Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship.
All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.
C.
Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the
work.
3.14 ACCEPTANCE
A.
The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests
described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner.
Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be
exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such
tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.
3.15 INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS
A.
Control Valve Installation
1. Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to ensure
compatibility with pipe design.
2. All control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60 degrees from the
vertical up position.
3. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that actuators
may be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipes and/or equipment.
5. Isolation valves shall be installed such that control valve body may be serviced without draining the
supply/return side piping system. Note to designer: this must also be shown. Unions shall be installed
at all connections to screwed type control valves.
6. Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1-1/2" in
diameter, with 1/4" high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identification numbers as
shown on approved controls shop drawings.
B.
Control Damper Installation
1. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with sheet
metal design.
2. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage
rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger than damper dimensions and
shall be square, straight, and level.
3. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square
and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower
corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ñ1/8".
4. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed
for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.
5. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper
face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that
blade.)
6. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle
damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must
open and close simultaneously.
23 09 01 - Page 22
Job #09270
7.
8.
9.
C.
Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.
Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.
After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to
prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.
Duct Smoke Detection
1. Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke detector
interface to HVAC systems.
2. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as the HVAC equipment to
be controlled.
3.16 TRAINING, COMMISSIONING & SYSTEM EVALUATION
A.
Owner Training Services: All specified owner training services for the HVAC equipment and controls
furnished under this specification section shall be provided by the building automation contractor. At initial
system start-up, the temperature controls contractor shall provide eight (8) hours of Owner Training.
B.
During the initial system training session(s), the temperature controls contractor will train the designated
staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently operate the system; create, modify
and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for the system; add additional panels
when required.
PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.01 SPACE MASTER ALARM
A.
The temperature control system shall generate an alarm whenever any temperature drops 5 degrees or
more below setpoint.
4.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A.
General
1. All items required to achieve the intended sequence of control of the equipment, shall be furnished,
installed and programmed by the Temperature Control Contractor.
B.
VAV Boxes
OCCUPIED MODE: WHEN THE ZONE TEMPERATURE IS BETWEEN THE OCCUPIED HEATING
AND COOLING SETPOINTS (INSIDE OF THE BIAS), THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL BE AT
THE MINIMUM CFM AND THERE WILL BE NO MECHANICAL HEATING. ON A RISE IN ZONE
TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE COOLING SETPOINT, THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL INCREASE
THE CFM AND THERE WILL BE NO MECHANICAL HEATING. ON A DROP IN ZONE
TEMPERATURE BELOW THE HEATING SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL WILL BE USED TO
MAINTAIN THE ZONE TEMPERATURE AND THE DAMPER IS CONTROLLED TO PROVIDE A
MINIMUM CFM.
UNOCCUPIED MODE: WHEN IN THIS MODE, WHILE THE ZONE TEMPERATURE IS BETWEEN
THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING AND COOLING SETPOINTS (INSIDE OF THE BIAS), THE PRIMARY
AIR DAMPER WILL BE AT THE MINIMUM CFM AND THERE WILL BE NO MECHANICAL HEATING.
ON A RISE IN ZONE TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING SETPOINT, THE
PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL INCREASE THE CFM (IF AVAILABLE) AND THERE WILL BE NO
MECHANICAL HEATING. ON A DROP IN ZONE TEMPERATURE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED
HEATING SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL WILL BE USED TO MAINTAIN THE ZONE
TEMPERATURE AND THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL BE AT THE MINIMUM CFM.
DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR: A DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR IS PROVIDED ON EACH
BOX FOR MONITORING PURPOSES.
OCCUPANCY CONTROL: AN OCCUPANCY SENSOR WILL SWITCH THE BOX MODE WHEN
OCCUPANCY OF THE ZONE IS DETECTED.
UNIT ENABLE: A NETWORK UNIT ENABLE SIGNAL WILL CONTROL THE MODE OF THE BOX.
Job #09270
23 09 01 - Page 23
NETWORK WARMUP-COOLDOWN: WARMUP-COOLDOWN MODES WILL BE ACTIVATED BY A
NETWORK COMMAND. WHEN THE ZONE TEMPERATURE IS BELOW THE EFFECTIVE HEATING
SETPOINT, THE BOX WILL USE WARM AIR FLOW , THEN REHEAT COIL TO MAIN TAIN THE
ZONE TEMPERATURE. WHEN THE BOX IS SATISFIED THE FLOW WILL REMAIN AT THE
WARMUP MINIMUM POSITION UNTIL THE WARM COMMAND HAS BEEN REMOVED.
C.
Operator Workstation
Display the following data:
Room/area served.
Room occupied/unoccupied.
Room temperature.
Room temperature set point, occupied.
Room temperature set point, occupied standby.
Room temperature set point, unoccupied.
Control Valve position as percent open
Fan status
END OF SECTION
23 09 01 - Page 24
Job #09270
SECTION 23 22 13
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Pipe and pipe fittings.
B.
Valves.
C.
Steam piping system.
D.
Steam condensate piping system.
A.
B.
C.
Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D.
Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation.
E.
Section 23 22 14 - Steam and Condensate Heating Specialties.
A.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998
(R2006).
B.
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
C.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and
Seamless; 2010.
D.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2011.
E.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
F.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and
Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
A.
When more than one piping system material is selected, ensure systems components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure
flanges, unions, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
B.
Use unions and flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Use dielectric
unions where joining dissimilar materials. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections.
C.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise.
D.
Use gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide manufacturers
catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.
Job #09270
23 22 13 - Page 1
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labelling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPING (15 PSIG MAXIMUM)
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3 malleable iron Class 125, or ASTM A234/A234M wrought steel.
2. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1 welded.
2.02 LOW PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 80, black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3 malleable iron Class 125, or ASTM A234/A234M wrought steel.
2. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1 welded.
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using
MSS SP-58 recommendations.
B.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
C.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
D.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
E.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 to 5 Inches: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
F.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
H.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger
rods.
2.04 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS
A.
Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig galvanized malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
B.
Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.
2. Copper Piping: Bronze.
3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed non-asbestos graphite fiber.
C.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
2.05 GATE VALVES
23 22 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
A.
Manufacturers:
B.
Up To and Including 2 Inches:
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw with backseating
stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, threaded ends.
C.
Over 2 Inches:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge
disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.
2.06 SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.
B.
Up To and Including 2 Inches:
1. Bronze or iron body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc with composition seat, threaded ends.
C.
Over 2 Inches:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged
ends.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D.
Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Whenever work is suspended during construction protect
open ends with temporary plugs or caps.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
C.
Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.
D.
Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, and floors.
E.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
F.
Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete
beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
G.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
Job #09270
23 22 13 - Page 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal
piping.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports
located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
H.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
I.
Slope steam piping one inch in 40 feet in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of
pipe level.
J.
Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet. Provide drip trap assembly at low points and before
control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver. Provide loop vents over
trapped sections.
K.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one
coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
L.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Hanger Spacing for Steel Steam Piping.
1. 1/2 inch: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. 3/4 inch and 1 inch: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. 2 inches: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
B.
Hanger Spacing for Steel Steam Condensate Piping.
1. 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
23 22 13 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 23 22 14
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Steam traps.
B.
Steam air vents.
A.
B.
Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping.
A.
ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
B.
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
C.
ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications; 2010a.
D.
ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004
(Reapproved 2009).
E.
ASTM A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
High-Temperature Service; 2008.
F.
ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at
Elevated Temperatures; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
G.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data:
1. Provide for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project.
2. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service
sizes, and finishes.
3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served,
and features for each specialty.
4. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application, selection, and hookup configuration. Include
pipe and accessory elevations.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, servicing requirements, and
recommended spare parts lists.
E.
1. Steam Trap Service Kits: One for each type and size.
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Job #09270
23 22 14 - Page 1
C.
D.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEAM TRAPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.
2. Marshall Engineered Products Company: www.mepcollc.com.
3. Spirax-Sarco: www.spiraxsarco.com/us.
4. Watson McDaniel Company: www.watsonmcdaniel.com.
B.
Steam Trap Applications:
1. Use Thermostatic Steam Traps for:
a. Steam radiation units.
b. Convectors.
c. Unit ventilators.
d. Other similar terminal heating units.
2. Use Float and Thermostatic Traps for:
a. Unit heaters.
b. Converters.
c. Heating coils.
d. Steam separators.
e. Flash tanks.
f.
Steam jacketed equipment.
g. Direct steam injected equipment.
h. Deaerators.
i.
Absorption chillers.
j.
Process equipment.
k. Main headers.
l.
Branch lines.
3. Use Inverted Bucket Steam Traps for:
a. Main headers.
b. Branch lines.
c. Steam jacketed equipment.
d. Direct steam injected equipment.
e. Deaerators.
f.
Absorption chillers.
C.
Steam Trap Performance:
1. Select to handle minimum of two times maximum condensate load of apparatus served.
2. Pressure Differentials:
a. Low Pressure Systems (5 psi and less): 1/2 psi.
b. Low Pressure Systems (15 psi maximum): 2 psi.
D.
Inverted Bucket Traps: ASTM A126, cast iron body with bolted cover, brass or stainless steel bucket,
stainless steel seats and plungers, and stainless steel lever mechanism with knife edge operating surfaces.
1. Rating: 60 psi WSP.
2. Features: Access to internal parts without disturbing piping, top test plug, bottom drain plugs.
3. Accessories:
a. Integral inlet strainer of brass or stainless steel.
b. Integral inlet check valve.
c. Integral bimetal air vent.
E.
Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A126 cast iron body and bolted cover, stainless steel or bronze
bellows type air vent, stainless steel or copper float, stainless steel lever and valve assembly
23 22 14 - Page 2
Job #09270
1.
2.
3.
Rating: 30 psi WSP.
Features: Access to internal parts without disturbing piping, bottom drain plug.
Accessories: Gage glass with shut-off cocks.
2.02 STEAM AIR VENTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.
2. ITT Hoffman Specialty: www.hoffmanspecialty.com.
3. Spirax-Sarco: www.spiraxsarco.com/us.
4. Watson McDaniel Company: www.watsonmcdaniel.com.
B.
125 psi WSP: Balanced pressure type; cast brass body and cover; access to internal parts without
disturbing piping; stainless steel bellows, stainless steel valve and seat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install steam and steam condensate piping and specialties in accordance with ASME B31.9.
B.
Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Steam Traps:
1. Provide minimum 3/4 inch size on steam mains and branches.
2. Install with union or flanged connections at both ends.
3. Provide gate valve and strainer at inlet, and gate valve at discharge.
4. Provide minimum 10 inch long, line size dirt pocket between apparatus and trap.
D.
Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps during temporary and trial usage, and until system has
been operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale.
3.02 SCHEDULES - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
23 22 14 - Page 3
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Metal ductwork.
B.
Duct cleaning.
A.
Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.
B.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
C.
Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
D.
Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
A.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005.
B.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a.
C.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
D.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
Bake Hardened; 2005b.
E.
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 2005a.
F.
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004.
G.
ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004.
H.
ASTM C 14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe; 2005a.
I.
ASTM C 14M - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe (Metric); 2005a.
J.
ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets;
2005a.
K.
ASTM C 443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using
Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2005a.
L.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
M. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire
N.
NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; National
Fire Protection Association; 2004.
O.
SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; 1985, First Edition.
P.
Job #09270
23 31 00 - Page 1
Q.
UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2005.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts
installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and
round ducts.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, and duct connections.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to
start of work for low pressure class and higher systems.
D.
Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage
rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
E.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting
location and type. Show additional fittings used.
A.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with
minimum 5 years of documented experience.
A.
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and NFPA 96 standards.
A.
Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with
G60/Z180 coating.
B.
Steel Ducts: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold-rolled commercial steel.
C.
Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene
vapor barrier film.
a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.
b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
c. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.
D.
Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible
with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.
E.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
23 31 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
B.
Provide air foil turning vanes when rectangular elbows must be used.
C.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30
degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
D.
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in
SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime
coat welded joints.
E.
Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee
connections may be used.
F.
Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide
blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior
side; seal to louver frame and duct.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
C.
Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
D.
Install fibrous glass ducts in accordance with SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. Obtain
manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation at beginning of installation.
E.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot
tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to
ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material
inside a metal ring.
F.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
G.
Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction
of air flow.
H.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use
flexible duct to change direction.
I.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held
in place with strap or clamp.
J.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
K.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent
construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain
sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt
with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Ductwork Material:
Job #09270
23 31 00 - Page 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): Steel.
Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): Steel.
Return and Relief: Steel.
General Exhaust: Steel.
Ductwork Pressure Class:
1. Supply (Heating Systems): 1 inch
2. Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1 inch.
3. Return and Relief: 1 inch.
4. General Exhaust: 1 inch.
END OF SECTION
23 31 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Air turning devices/extractors.
B.
Duct access doors.
C.
Duct test holes.
D.
Flexible duct connections.
E.
Volume control dampers.
A.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
A.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
B.
C.
UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers.
A.
Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.
A.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as
A.
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide two of each size and type of fusible link.
Job #09270
23 33 00 - Page 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A.
Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable
blades, mounting straps.
2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
3. SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com.
4. United McGill.
B.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as
indicated.
C.
Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES
A.
Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck
fittings to clear insulation.
B.
Products:
1. Carlisle HVAC; Dynair Test Port with Red Cap with O-Ring Seal: www.carlislehvac.com.
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. FLEXMASTER U.S.A.
B.
Trilaminate liner of aluminum foil, fiberglass, and aluminized polyester, mechanically locked without
adhesives. Helix of corrosive resistant galvanized steel, formed and mechanically locked to fabric. Outer
jacket of gray fire retardant polyethylene material; 1" thick fiberglass insulation.
C.
UL-181, Class 1 listed air duct.
D.
indicated.
2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
indicated.
B.
Splitter Dampers:
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes
over 24 inches.
2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge
or rod.
3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with
set screw .
C.
End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade
dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
D.
Quadrants:
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
23 33 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and
pressure class.
B.
Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide
minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide
4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C.
Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
D.
At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment.
E.
At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the
equipment; see Section 22 05 48.
F.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken
from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
23 33 00 - Page 3
SECTION 23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Variable volume terminal units.
B.
Integral controls.
A.
Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
B.
Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire
B.
UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.
Include catalog performance ratings that indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC designation. Include
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
1. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth
octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 to 4 inch wg.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and
registered with manufacturer.
A.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Environmental Technologies: www.environmental-tec.com.
B.
Johnson Controls, Inc: www.johnsoncontrols.com.
C.
Price: www.price-hvac.com.
D.
Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
E.
Tuttle & Bailey: www.tutttleandbailey.com.
Job #09270
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00 - Page 1
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for connection to single duct, central air
systems, with electronic variable volume controls,, hot water heating coils.
B.
Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and air flow indicator. Include unit nominal
air flow, maximum factory set airflow, minimum factory set air flow, and coil type.
2.03 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME UNITS
A.
Basic Assembly:
1. Casings: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel.
2. Lining: Minimum 3/4 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated fibrous glass insulation, 1.5 lb/cu ft density,
meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Face lining with mylar film.
3. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections for duct attachment.
4. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip and drive connections.
B.
Basic Unit:
1. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control components inside
protective metal shroud.
2. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self lubricating bearings;
maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at 3 inches rated inlet static pressure.
C.
Attenuator Section: Line attenuator sections with 2 inch thick insulation.
D.
Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.
E.
Hot Water Heating Coil:
1. Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak tested under
water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.
2. Capacity: Based on 180 degree F entering water, 150 degree F leaving water and 50 percent total air
volume.
F.
Automatic Damper Operator:
1. Electric Actuator: 24 volt with remote temperature read and reset capability.
G.
Velocity Reset Controller and Probe:
1. Pneumatic.
a. Calibration pressure taps for pressure independent control to compensate for varying inlet static
pressure.
b. Minimum and maximum limits set at reset device.
c. Maintain air flow to within 5 percent of set point with inlet static pressure variations up to 2 inches.
d. Reset span, fixed at 5 psi shall remain constant regardless of minimum or maximum setting.
Reset start point shall be adjustable from 3-10 psi.
H.
Thermostat: Electronic type with appropriate mounting hardware. Refer to Section 23 09 13.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
C.
Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
D.
Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 00.
E.
Provide minimum of 5 ft of 1 inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units.
F.
Install heating coils in accordance with Section 23 82 16.
G.
Coordinate controls with Building Management System.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
3.02 ADJUSTING
A.
Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100 percent
of design flow to 10 percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 50 percent full flow.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00 - Page 3
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Diffusers.
B.
Registers/grilles.
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.
A.
AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc.; 2007.
B.
ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute;
2001.
C.
ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society
of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006.
D.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size,
finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size,
location, application, and noise level.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
A.
Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
B.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.
B.
Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
Job #09270
23 37 00 - Page 1
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers
are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.02 SCHEDULES (Reference Drawings)
END OF SECTION
23 37 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 23 82 16
AIR COILS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Steam heating coils.
A.
A.
ARI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; Air-Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute; 2001 (R2002) .
B.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and
rough-in dimensions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and
rough-in dimensions.
D.
Certificates: Certify that coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures meet or exceed specified
requirements.
A.
A.
Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing
indoors.
B.
Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Aerofin Corporation: www.aerofin.com.
B.
Great American Coil: www.luvata.com.
C.
Trane Inc: www.greatamericancoil.com.
D.
McQuay International: www.mcquay.com.
2.02 STEAM HEATING COILS
A.
Tubes: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper or brass arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, expanded into fins,
silver brazed joints.
B.
Fins: Aluminum continuous plate type with full fin collars.
C.
Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gage galvanized steel with 3/8 inch mounting holes on 3 inch
centers. Provide tube supports for coils longer than 36 inches.
Job #09270
AIR COILS
23 82 16 - Page 1
D.
Headers: Cast iron with tubes expanded into header.
E.
Testing: Air test under water to 350 psi for working pressure of 200 psi and 220 degrees F.
F.
Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs in headers for drain and vent, threaded plugs in return bends
and in headers opposite each tube, sloped within frame to condensate connection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
1. Support coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and secure to
casings.
2. Provide frames for maximum three coil sections.
3. Arrange supports to avoid piercing drain pans.
4. Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.
C.
Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.
D.
Install coils level. Install cleanable tube coils with 1:50 pitch.
E.
Make connections to coils with unions and flanges.
F.
Steam Coils:
G.
Insulate headers located outside air flow as specified for piping. Refer to Section 22 07 19.
END OF SECTION
AIR COILS
23 82 16 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 26 00 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
General Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26, 27 and 28.
B.
General Requirements, Division 1 provisions.
C.
This Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, tools, construction
equipment and machinery, transportation, and all services required for the execution, completion and
operation of all electrical systems, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in the
Work.
1.02 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Contractor shall visit the site and shall familiarize himself with conditions which will affect work he is to
perform. Submission of a proposal by this Contractor shall be conclusive evidence that this Contractor has
visited the site and has given proper consideration and evaluation of these conditions in preparation of his
proposal. No allowance shall be made in his behalf for extra expense incurred due to failure or neglect on
his part to make this visit and examination.
B.
Where active sewers, gas, electric or other services are encountered during performance of this contract,
Contractor shall protect, brace and support them as required. Do not prevent, interrupt or disturb operation
of existing services that are to remain. Relocate existing service as required.
C.
Drawings show approximate locations of existing services. Contractor shall check with utility companies
and municipal agencies for exact locations of services which they may expect to encounter.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The following codes and standards, latest edition and/or revisions unless noted otherwise, are hereby
incorporated by reference and made a part of this specification:
1. Applicable Federal, State and local codes, ordinances and regulations, which also shall govern over
NEC should a conflict exist.
2. NEC - National Electrical Code, latest edition as approved by the local authority having jurisdiction.
3. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
4. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
5. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
6. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association.
7. ASTM - American Society for Testing of Materials.
8. Regulations of the local power utility company.
9. MEC - Michigan Energy Code.
10. HEW - Department of Health, Education and Welfare, HRA 76-4000.
11. OSHA - U.S. Occupational Safety and health Act.
12. MDPH - Michigan Department of Public Health Regulations.
13. Regulations of the local telephone utility company.
14. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Equipment and materials shall bear the "UL" label where labeling
service is regularly furnished.
15. NFPA - National Fire Prevention Association.
16. All work shall be in accordance with these codes and standards.
17. Notify Design Professional in writing and prior to bid opening of conflicts between these codes and
standards, and the drawings and specifications.
18. Whenever the requirements of Drawings and Specifications exceed those of the applicable codes and
standards listed, requirements of Drawings and Specifications shall govern.
Job #09270
26 00 00 - Page 1
1.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Contractor shall file approval forms when required, obtain and pay for all required permits, pay all required
deposits, arrange for and pay for all required or necessary inspections.
B.
Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections in keeping with project progress to prevent
unnecessary delays. Upon completion of the project, Contractor shall submit all final inspection certificates
to Design Professional for Owner’s file.
1.05 COORDINATION
A.
B.
Cooperate fully with all other Contractors and trades to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation
of interdependant systems and system elements.
C.
Contractor shall consult Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature, and Specifications for all trades
to determine nature and extent of work specified in other sections which adjoins or attaches to his work to
which his work attaches or joins.
D.
Contractor shall confer with other Contractors and Subcontractors at the site to coordinate his work with
theirs in view of job conditions so that interferences may be eliminated and that maximum head room and
clearance may be obtained.
E.
In the event that interferences develop, Design Professional's decision will be final as to which trade shall
relocate its work and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of conduit, cabling or
equipment to clear such interferences.
F.
Cutting, patching and painting resulting from this Contractor's improper location or coordination of the work
shall be done by Contractor who originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear
expenses.
G.
Contractor is responsible for providing and installing any access panels or doors which may be required to
provide access to junction boxes, controls, fittings, switches, etc. that are installed behind permanent walls,
ceilings, bulkheads, soffits or floors..
A.
Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for work and coordinate conduit and equipment
locations with other trades.
B.
All major patching and repairing of work caused by this Contractor shall be done by Contractor who
originally installed same, but this Contractor will be required to bear expenses.
C.
No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be done without written permission from the Design
Professional.
D.
Provide fire stops for all openings in fire rated surfaces. Seal space between sleeves and conduits with
approved fire proofing material. Integrity of system shall be maintained to the rating of the item pierced.
1.07 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general layout of the electrical systems. All work shall be
executed in strict conformity with Drawings, accepted Shop Drawings and these Specifications. Drawings
are not to be scaled nor to serve as Shop Drawings.
B.
Drawings show design intent and this Contractor shall field check dimensions, actual locations, distances
and levels will be governed by actual field conditions and variations in equipment being provided.
C.
Contractor shall follow Drawings in laying out work and checking Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in
which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where
headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, Design Professional shall be notified before proceeding
with installation.
26 00 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
D.
Contractor shall check latest architectural Drawings and locate light switches from same where door swings
are different from electrical Drawings.
E.
Items not specifically mentioned in Specifications or noted on Drawings, but which are obviously necessary
to make a complete working installation shall be included.
F.
If directed by Design Professional, this Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable
modifications in layout as needed to prevent conflicts with work of other trades or for proper execution of
work.
1.08 REFERENCES
A.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
B.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
D.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2000).
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Design Professional will not be responsible for errors in quantities, dimensions to fit job conditions, details of
fabrication, or for errors resulting from mistakes in Submittals even though approved.
C.
Responsibility for these items rests with Contractor and his Suppliers.
1. Shop Drawings required shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
a. Each type of lighting fixture.
b. Panelboards.
c. Transformers.
d. Circuit Breakers.
e. Fire Alarm Devices, Panels and Related Equipment
A.
Perform in accordance with electrical codes required by the, State of Michigan.
1. Maintain one copy on project site.
B.
not less than three years of experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years
of experience.
D.
Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed in the State of Michigan.
E.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
A.
Coordinate all electrical material installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.
B.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
1.12 EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
Only substitutions made by addendum, prior to receipt of bids, will be binding.
C.
no fault of this Contractor.
Job #09270
26 00 00 - Page 3
D.
Where equipment manufacturer's names are listed, they are listed not only to indicate an acceptable
manufacturer, but further to insure providing a certain quality, a feature, or other item of design not
specifically mentioned in the detailed description.
E.
Where Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified or detailed on the Drawings,
which requires any redesign of structure, partitions, foundations, wiring or any other part of electrical or
architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new Drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be
prepared by this Contractor at his own expense.
F.
Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of wiring, conduit and
equipment from that specified or indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings, Contractor shall furnish and
install any such electrical wiring, conduit, etc., and any other additional equipment required by system at no
additional cost to Owner.
1.13 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A.
In general, mounting heights above finished floor to the centerline of boxes and equipment shall be as
follows, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Switches and Pushbuttons
4'-0"
2. Receptacles - Finished Areas
1'-6"
3. Receptacles - Mechanical Rooms
3'-0"
4. Safety Switches
6'-0" to top
5. Motor Starters
5'-0"
6. Panels
6'-0" to top of panel providing bottom of cabinet is not
less than 1'-0" above floor
1.14 WARRANTY
A.
Contractor shall guarantee all work installed by him or his Subcontractor to be free from defect in materials
and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the work, unless a longer
period is stipulated under specific headings, and he shall repair or replace at no additional cost to Owner,
any material or equipment developing defected and shall also make good any damage caused by such
defected or the correction of defects. Repairs or replacements shall bear additional guarantee, as originally
called for, dated from the final acceptance of the repair of replacement. This requirement shall be binding
even though it will exceed product guarantees normally furnished by some manufacturers.
B.
Contractor shall submit his own and each equipment manufacturer's written certificate, warranting that each
item or equipment furnished complies with all requirements of Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Note that guarantee shall run from date of final acceptance of work, NOT from date of installation of a
device or piece of equipment.
1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Supply two containers of flourescent lamps for Owner's use in maintaining lighting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE
2.01 MOTORS
A.
Unless otherwise noted, all motors will be provided and installed by other trades for final connections by
Electrical Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP
A.
Execute the work required in a manner evidenced by the "best trade practices" contributing to efficiency of
operation, minimum maintenance, accessibility and aesthetics of the installation.
26 00 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
B.
Equipment and materials, unless noted otherwise as being reused, shall be new and shall conform to the
requirements of standard specification and tests of organizations as listed in this division and in the
requirements noted in other sections.
3.02 INSERTS, SLEEVES, OPENINGS, HANGERS, ETC.
A.
Furnish to General Contractor, before pouring of concrete or laying of masonry, all inserts, sleeves,
openings, hangers, etc., located in walls, floors, ceilings or roof necessary to complete the work, including
setting or location diagrams.
B.
Provide flashings and construct roof openings to meet the requirements of the roofing manufacturer and
requirements of Division 07.
C.
Provide fire stops for all electrical openings in fire rated surfaces. Seal space between sleeves and conduit
with approved fire proofing material. Integrity of system shall be maintained to the rating of the item
pierced. Coordinate with Firestopping.
3.03 PAINTING
A.
Touch-up paint manufacturer's finishes on electrical equipment marred during shipment, construction or
installation.
B.
Prime paint all bare metal electrical equipment supports, platforms, etc.
C.
Fronts of all flush cabinets shall have prime coat only. Finish coats will be by others.
D.
Make all joints in conduit laid in concrete or underground tight by applying a liberal coating of asphaltum
paint.
E.
Painting shall conform to the requirements of Division 9 of these specifications.
3.04 PARTS RECEIPT
A.
Electrical Contractor shall retain all portable and detachable portions of installation in his possession such
as keys, tools, wiring diagrams, manuals, etc., until completion of work and shall then turn them over to
Owner, or his authorized representative and obtain an itemized receipt. This receipt is to be attached to
request for final payment for electrical work
3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Conductors shall bear identification as to size and type of insulation and shall be equipped with wire
markers indicating the circuit number, wire number and/or phase letter.
B.
Identify electrical equipment with the name of equipment, equipment controlled or system involved.
C.
On all surface less than 4 inches square, identification shall be made by means of raised letters and figures
on an aluminum strip with a pressure sensitive adhesive.
D.
On surfaces 4 inches square and larger, in unfinished areas such as mechanical and boiler rooms,
identification shall be made by means of stenciling with bright yellow paint, or a good quality decal.
E.
Disconnecting switches, as required, shall have nameplates to indicate the circuit and panel from which the
service originates and the equipment which it controls.
F.
Lighting and receptacle panels shall have nameplates designating their name and voltage such as; LP-A,
277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 W.
G.
Nameplates shall be black laminated plastic with white characters. Characters on nameplates shall be 1/4
inch high, unless otherwise directed in field. Characters shall be engraved on nameplates with
nomenclature as shown on Drawings or as directed by Design Professional.
H.
Any stenciling shall be done only after the general painting of building interiors, etc., is completed.
Job #09270
26 00 00 - Page 5
3.06 PROTECTION AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Responsibility for care and protection of electrical work rests with Contractor until it has been tested and
accepted.
B.
After delivery, before and after installation, protect equipment and materials against theft, injury or damage
from all causes.
C.
Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings, etc., with temporary plugs, caps or burlap.
D.
Each Contractor shall receive, properly house, handle hoist, deliver to proper location, equipment and other
material required for this Contract.
3.07 REMODELING AND DEMOLITION WORK
A.
Remove all existing wire, conduit and electrical devices conflicting with construction, where old facilities are
indicated to be removed, and where new facilities replace old installations. Coordinate with other sections.
Where possible, retain existing conduits and switching.
B.
Furnish and install new conduit and wiring to replace existing conduit and wiring abandoned or removed as a
part of project where required.
C.
Extend the existing conduit system or install new conduit and wire to provide electrical service to new
devices or existing devices where required.
D.
Existing electrical equipment interfering with new construction or where called for on Drawings, shall be
removed. All existing, exposed conduit abandoned as part of project shall be removed. All unused
openings in junction or pull boxes and device boxes shall be closed with a suitable cover or plug.
E.
Electrical equipment and materials removed on the project shall remain the property of Owner and shall be
stored in a location on property designated by Owner. If Owner refuses to accept any or all of the
demolition items, Contractor will be responsible to dispose of same.
F.
Existing electrical equipment, switches, controls, etc., interfering with new construction, but not being
abandoned as part of project, shall be relocated as may be necessary and/or as shown on Drawings.
3.08 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A.
B.
Electrical Contractor shall provide, install and maintain the following:
1. Temporary lighting as directed by the General Contractor during the Work.
C.
If additional power or wiring is required, Contractor requiring same shall pay the Electrical Contractor for
providing this service.
END OF SECTION
26 00 00 - Page 6
Job #09270
SECTION 26 05 01
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Electrical demolition.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C.
Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
D.
Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.
E.
Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.
B.
Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.
When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such
operations.
C.
Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for
service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.
1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.
2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
D.
Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable
system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.
1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system.
2. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance.
E.
Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready
for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.
1. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A.
Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B.
Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
C.
Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut
conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
Job #09270
26 05 01 - Page 1
D.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is
abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.
E.
Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
F.
Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been
removed.
G.
Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
H.
Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
I.
Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access
panel as appropriate.
J.
Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or
as specified.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A.
Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.
B.
Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged
circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing
revised circuiting arrangement.
C.
Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior
surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts.
END OF SECTION
26 05 01 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 V AND LESS)
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Metal-clad cable.
B.
Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
C.
Wiring connectors.
D.
Electrical tape.
E.
Wire pulling lubricant.
A.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding
conductors and grounding connectors.
B.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
A.
ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
B.
ASTM B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or
Soft; 2004.
C.
ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors
for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
D.
ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.
E.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
F.
NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2006.
G.
NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground Feeder and
Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2007.
H.
NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).
I.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.
J.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K.
UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.
UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N.
UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O.
UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P.
UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
Job #09270
26 05 19 - Page 1
Q.
UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
R.
UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with
the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage
drop.
2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for
use with the conductors to be installed.
3. Notify Design Professional of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
A.
Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A.
Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
B.
Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or
required.
C.
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D.
Armored cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
luminaires.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to view.
c. Where exposed to damage.
d. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
e. For isolated ground circuits.
E.
Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to view.
c. Where exposed to damage.
26 05 19 - Page 2
Job #09270
d.
e.
For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for
those locations.
For isolated ground circuits.
F.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
G.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
H.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway.
I.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
J.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
K.
Underground Installations: Use only building wire in raceway or direct burial cable.
L.
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
M. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
N.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
O.
Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
P.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
Q.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
R.
Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
American Wire and Cable Company: www.americanwireandcable.com.
B.
Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
C.
Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
D.
General Electric Company: www.ge.com.
E.
Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.iewc.com.
F.
Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
2.03 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
indicated.
C.
Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.
D.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as
required for a complete operating system.
E.
Comply with NEMA WC 70.
F.
Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
G.
Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
H.
Conductor Material:
1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor
sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors
complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Minimum Conductor Size:
Job #09270
26 05 19 - Page 3
1.
2.
J.
Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
Control Circuits: 14 AWG.
Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction.
Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
b. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
c. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.
d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when
existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.
2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A.
Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.
Conductor Stranding:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
2. Control Circuits: Stranded.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D.
Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2.
E.
Conductor: Copper.
2.05 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE
A.
Description: NFPA 70, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 493, Type
UF-B.
B.
Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated.
C.
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D.
E.
Description: NFPA 70, Type UF.
F.
Conductor: Copper.
G.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
H.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
I.
Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning
legend describing buried electrical lines.
2.06 METAL-CLAD CABLE
A.
Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com.
26 05 19 - Page 4
Job #09270
2.
3.
Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in
classified firestop systems to be used.
C.
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D.
E.
Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.
F.
Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
G.
Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
H.
Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.
I.
Conductor: Copper.
J.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
K.
Insulation Temperature Rating: 60 degrees C.
L.
Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
M. Armor Material: Steel.
N.
Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.
2.07 WIRING CONNECTORS
A.
Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be
connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.
B.
Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.
2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.
C.
Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for
terminal lugs.
2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs
when only compression connectors are specified.
3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide
connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the
overcurrent protective device.
4. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to terminal
screws.
5. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.
D.
Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors
without stripping insulation.
E.
Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
F.
Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302
degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for
damp and wet locations.
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com.
Job #09270
26 05 19 - Page 5
G.
Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
H.
Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
1. Manufacturers:
I.
Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection
to be made.
1. Manufacturers:
2.08 WIRING ACCESSORIES
A.
Electrical Tape:
1. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510;
minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application
down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.
B.
Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for
use at the installation temperature.
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com.
c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C.
Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.
Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
F.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Circuiting Requirements:
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.
5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited
circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
26 05 19 - Page 6
Job #09270
6.
Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to
three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted.
Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
B.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
D.
Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type UF-B) in accordance with NECA 121.
E.
Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.
F.
Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the
manufacturer.
G.
Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.
H.
Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure.
Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.
I.
Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):
a. Use listed fittings.
b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not
use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
J.
Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
K.
Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.
L.
Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in
conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or
damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other
contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.
M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the
application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.
N.
Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
O.
Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each
piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served
by more than one nominal voltage system.
P.
Provide wire and cable markers in accordance with Section 26 05 53 identifying circuit number or other
designation indicated at the following locations:
1. At each source and load connection.
2. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
3. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.
Job #09270
26 05 19 - Page 7
4.
In cable tray, at maximum intervals of 20 feet.
Q.
Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
R.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,
including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
S.
Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
T.
Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.
U.
Use wiring methods indicated.
V.
Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
W. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
X.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Y.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Z.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
AA. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its
circuit number or other designation indicated.
A.
Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Construction Manager's General
Requirements.
B.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Owner's requirements.
C.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
D.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is
required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.
E.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
F.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
END OF SECTION
26 05 19 - Page 8
Job #09270
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Grounding and bonding components.
A.
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRODES
A.
Rod Electrodes: Copper.
1. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
2. Length: 8 feet.
2.02 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
B.
Wire: Stranded copper.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B.
Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve
specified resistance to ground.
B.
Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where
indicated. Bond steel together.
C.
Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - Page 1
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
B.
Anchors and fasteners.
A.
Association; 2010.
B.
A.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type
adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
B.
Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.
3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners.
4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.
6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
D.
Formed Steel Channel:
1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat
appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring-lock washers under all nuts.
2. In wet locations install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads.
3. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum four (4) anchors. Provide steel
channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off of wall.
4. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support lfush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud
walls.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components,
in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
2. Obtain permission from Design Professional before drilling or cutting structural members.
Job #09270
26 05 29 - Page 1
B.
Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate
strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
D.
In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.
E.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow
partitions.
END OF SECTION
26 05 29 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 26 05 34
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
A.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.
Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
D.
Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.
A.
ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.
C.
ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005.
D.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical
E.
NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
F.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and
Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
G.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate
Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
H.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2003.
I.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2004.
J.
A.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
A.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A.
Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
Job #09270
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 1
B.
Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the
specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive
requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit.
C.
Underground:
1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.
2. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where
emerging from underground.
3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized
steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.
D.
Embedded Within Concrete:
1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted.
2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted.
3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where
emerging from concrete.
E.
Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F.
Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G.
Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing
(EMT).
H.
Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit
(IMC).
I.
Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.
J.
Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
K.
Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
L.
Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.
M. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit after receiving approval of Design
Professional.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they
comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel
through them.
B.
Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
C.
Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
D.
Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. All Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) minimum trade size.
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 2
Job #09270
2.
3.
4.
E.
Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.
Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.
Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specified.
2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.
2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com.
2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
3. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 886 for the
classification of the installed location.
4. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.04 METAL CONDUIT
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com.
2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
E.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.
3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying
with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.
Job #09270
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 3
3.
Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D.
Description: Interlocked steel construction.
E.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.06 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Manufacturers:
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and
labeled as complying with UL 360.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
D.
Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
E.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com.
2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 797.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
D.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
E.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.
2.08 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A.
Manufacturers:
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 4
Job #09270
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to
physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651;
material to match conduit.
D.
Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
E.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.09 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC)
A.
Manufacturers:
B.
Description: NFPA 70, Type LFNC liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit listed and labeled as complying
with UL 1660.
C.
Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B;
suitable for the type of conduit to be connected.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A.
Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.
B.
Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be
installed.
C.
Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to
be installed.
D.
Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
E.
Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.
F.
Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be
installed.
G.
Description: NEMA TC 2.
H.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B.
Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C.
D.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
E.
Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system.
Job #09270
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 5
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
C.
Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
D.
Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.
E.
Install liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) in accordance with NECA 111.
F.
Conduit Routing:
1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across floors.
b. Across roofs.
c. Across top of parapet walls.
d. Across building exterior surfaces.
6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible
manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building
structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.
7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.
8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points.
9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings
where moisture may collect.
11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.
12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not
limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.
13. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
G.
Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not
provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
H.
Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel
conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or
split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry
locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
5. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.
6. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 6
Job #09270
I.
Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams,
without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush
with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent
entry of moisture and gases.
6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.
7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where
possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as
indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include
proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
8. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.
9. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
J.
Underground Installation:
1. Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with 31 00 01.
2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.
3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length for
service entrance where not concrete-encased.
K.
Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by
others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.
L.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
M. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
A.
Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
B.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of
moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.
B.
Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
C.
Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101.
D.
Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
F.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and
split hangers.
G.
Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on
each for 25 percent additional conduits.
H.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29.
Job #09270
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 7
I.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.
J.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
K.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
L.
Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
M. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
N.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
O.
Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
P.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R.
Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry
and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure
for 20 minutes, minimum.
S.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make
sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal
conduit larger than 2 inch size.
T.
Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
U.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic.
V.
Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
W. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
X.
Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
Y.
Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods required by code.
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing
penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation specified.
END OF SECTION
CONDUIT
26 05 34 - Page 8
Job #09270
SECTION 26 05 37
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B.
Pull and junction boxes.
A.
B.
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas.
A.
B.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and
Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
C.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
D.
NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical
E.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2008.
F.
A.
B.
Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com.
B.
Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology: www.arc-co.com.
C.
Arrow-Hart/Division of Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.
D.
Bryant Electric/Division of Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-bryant.com.
E.
Steel City/Division of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
F.
Unity Manufacturing: www.unitymfg.com.
2.02 OUTLET BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2
inch male fixture studs where required.
B.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide
threaded hubs.
Job #09270
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 1
2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify locations of boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B.
Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
C.
Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.
D.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
E.
Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
F.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
G.
Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access
panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
H.
Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods
specified in Section 07 84 00.
I.
Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
J.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
K.
Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
L.
Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
M. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide
minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
N.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish
thickness.
O.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
P.
Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both
supported within 12 inches of box.
Q.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
R.
Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
S.
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
T.
Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other
locations.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.
B.
Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 2
Job #09270
C.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
BOXES
26 05 37 - Page 3
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Nameplates and labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Field-painted identification of conduit.
A.
B.
Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power
conductors and cables 600 V and less.
C.
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.
A.
ASTM D 709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
B.
C.
NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2009.
D.
UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
A.
Coordination:
1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of
identification products.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Construction Manager's General Requirements for submittals procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.
C.
Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
A.
A.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and
associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Panelboards:
1) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify
spares and spaces using pencil.
2. Emergency System Equipment:
Job #09270
26 05 53 - Page 1
a.
Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location of
on-site emergency power sources.
B.
Communication Cabinets: Nameplates.
C.
Conduit: Conduit markers.
D.
Control Device Station: Labels.
E.
Electrical Distribution and Control Equipment Enclosures: Nameplates.
F.
Junction Box Load Connections: Wire markers.
G.
Outlet Box Load Connections: Wire markers.
H.
Panel Gutter Load Connections: Wire markers.
I.
Pull Box Load Connections: Wire markers.
2.02 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A.
Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
B.
Letter Size:
1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
C.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for
identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations.
2.03 WIRE MARKERS
A.
Description: Vinyl cloth type self-adhesive wire markers.
B.
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and at
load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits and with control
wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
1. Use the following colors for color-coding phase conductors:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
C.
Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on
drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance.
Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
4. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
26 05 53 - Page 2
Job #09270
5.
6.
7.
8.
Conduits: Legible from the floor.
Boxes: Outside face of cover.
Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
Devices: Outside face of cover.
C.
Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D.
Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces
using self-adhesive backing, or epoxy cement.
E.
Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and
edges properly sealed.
F.
Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.
A.
Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper
adhesion.
B.
Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
C.
Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws.
D.
Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
E.
Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09 90 00.
1. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet.
2. Paint bands 20 feet on center.
3. Colors:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
26 05 53 - Page 3
SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Occupancy Sensors.
B.
Low Voltage Controls.
A.
Section 26 05 13 - Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables
B.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
C.
Section 26 05 34 - Conduit
D.
Section 26 05 37 - Boxes
E.
Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Submit product data showing dimensions and ratings for power supplies, relays, and
switches.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
A.
Submit project record documents.
B.
Accurately record location of switches, power supplies, and control enclosures. Include description of
switching and circuiting arrangements.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data.
B.
Include replacement part numbers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wattstopper
B.
Leviton
2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
Sensors shall be dual technology, detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared
heat changes.
B.
Sensors shall be line voltage or low voltage with power pack to be a complete operational unit.
C.
Provide auxiliary relays as required to control multiple circuits and multiple voltages.
D.
Sensors shall have digital self adjusting technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to fit
occupant usage patterns. Self adjusting technology shall be turned on/off by dip switch setting.
Job #09270
26 09 23 - Page 1
E.
Sensors shall have time delay set by self adjusting technology or shall have fixed time delay of 5 to 30
minutes, set by dip switch.
F.
Sensor shall have an LED indicator to verify detection within the area controlled.
G.
Sensors shall have standard 5 year warranty and shall be UL listed.
2.03 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLS
A.
Control panel shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure sized to house components as indicated on drawings.
B.
Control Panel shall include time clock to control relays on schedule as indicated.
C.
Automatic control switches shall override time clock operation of relays and/or contactors as indicated in
schedule on drawings.
D.
Control system shall include an exterior photocell where indicated in lighting control diagram on drawings.
Exterior photocell shall have footcandle range of 1-15 and an eight second time delay.
E.
Lighting Control Panel operation shall include capability of automatically switching relays, with or without
time delay, or manually switching relays with wall switches as indicated in Lighting Control Diagram on
drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify field dimensions are as shown on manufacturer’s layout drawings.
C.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install wall or ceiling mounted occupancy sensors per approved manufacturer’s shop drawings.
C.
Install components to be accessible. Allow space for adequate ventilation and circulation of air.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide owner with minimum 4 hours of training.
END OF SECTION
26 09 23 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Power distribution panelboards.
B.
Lighting and appliance panelboards.
C.
Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.
A.
B.
Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.
A.
FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision
D, 2006.
B.
Association; 2010.
C.
NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2009.
D.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.
E.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not
More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005).
F.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).
G.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.
H.
NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
I.
J.
K.
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
L.
UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
M. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N.
UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Job #09270
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 1
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures,
overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent
protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor
terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of product.
E.
Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting
arrangements.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures
and intervals.
A.
B.
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA
407.
B.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy
plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C.
Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each panelboard key.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.
B.
General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.
C.
Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D.
Siemens: www.siemens.com.
E.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS
A.
Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service
conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
C.
Short Circuit Current Rating:
D.
Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 2
Job #09270
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
F.
Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder
and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G.
Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H.
Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation
locations:
2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening.
4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,
connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker
type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on
the drawings.
B.
Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C.
Bussing:
1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D.
Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.
E.
Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.
1. Rated for Service Entrance where noted on Drawings.
G.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.
H.
Minimum integrated short circuit rating:
1. 480 Volt Panelboards: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
I.
Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in
each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole: UL listed.
Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted
for same size Class RK-5 fuse.
J.
Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.
K.
Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
L.
Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened withhinged door with flush lock, finished in manufacturer's standard
gray enamel.
Job #09270
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 3
2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A.
Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit
breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as
indicated on the drawings.
B.
Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C.
Bussing:
1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.
2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
3. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D.
Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
F.
Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.
G.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide
insulated ground bus where scheduled.
H.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated.
1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
I.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip
handle for all poles; UL listed.
1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.
2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.
3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
J.
Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
K.
Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for 480 volt
panelboards.
L.
Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and
flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers
listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable;
ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current
rating indicated, but not less than:
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short
circuit current rating indicated.
3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for
overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.
5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 4
Job #09270
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general
workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.
C.
Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
NFPA 70.
D.
Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
E.
Install panelboards plumb.
F.
Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening
completely covered.
G.
Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches
does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
H.
Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into
accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
I.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
J.
Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
K.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.
L.
Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
M. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches
above floor.
N.
Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
O.
Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard, and each power
distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating the loads served. Identify
spares and spaces.
P.
Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
Q.
Provide identification nameplate for each panelboard in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
R.
Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.
S.
Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify
each as SPARE.
1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch.
T.
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26.
A.
Perform adjusting, field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements.
B.
C.
Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.
D.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit
breakers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
Job #09270
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 5
A.
Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
B.
Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
C.
Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured
steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain
proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - Page 6
Job #09270
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Receptacles.
C.
Wall plates.
A.
A.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
B.
NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1999 (R 2005).
C.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2002 (R2008).
D.
A.
Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other
sections or by others.
2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment
to be installed.
3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.
4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide
suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
5. Notify Design Professional of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
B.
Sequencing:
1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
A.
B.
Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
C.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.
Job #09270
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 1
B.
Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bryant Electric: www.hubbell-bryant.com.
B.
Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.
C.
Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
D.
Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com.
E.
Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a single
manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A.
Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B.
For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not
less than that of the branch circuit.
C.
Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed
outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES
A.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
B.
Finishes:
1. All Wiring Devices: Ivory with white stainless steel wall plate unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A.
Wall
1.
2.
3.
Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red handle.
Ratings:
a. Voltage: 120 volts, AC.
b. Current: 20 amperes.
B.
Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, and 3-way.
2.05 RECEPTACLES
A.
Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
B.
Duplex Convenience Receptacles.
C.
GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory
requirements.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A.
Cover plates for receptacles, switrches, phone and data shall be deluxe, smooth, 304 stainless steel. Use
oversized deluxe, smooth, stainless steel for devices installed in masonry walls.
1. Cover Plates For Wiring Devices: Cooper #93XXX.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 2
Job #09270
B.
Weatherproof cover plates for receptacles outdoors or as indicated on Drawings shall be heavy-duty
construction, gasketed for weather resistance, UL listed for application. Use "in-use" covers in all wet
locations and metal "wet" location when closed covers in damp locations. RE: NEC 406.8.
1. Damp Location, Vertical: Hubbell #WP26 (WPF526)
2. Wet Location, Vertical: Hubbell #WP26M
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
B.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C.
Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
D.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
E.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights
specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
D.
Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
E.
Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
F.
Install wall switches with OFF position down.
G.
Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without
strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings.
Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
H.
Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated
for future use.
I.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
J.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
K.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
L.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
M. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 to obtain mounting heights specified.
B.
Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
Job #09270
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 3
C.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter.
E.
Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor.
F.
Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
G.
Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished
floor.
A.
Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Owner's requirements.
B.
Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
D.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
E.
Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
F.
Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory
finish.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Fuses.
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007).
B.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including time-current curves.
C.
1. Extra Fuses: One of each type and size.
2. Fuse Pullers: One.
A.
B.
with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
C.
indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cooper Bussmann: www.bussmann.com.
B.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc: www.ferrazshawmut.com.
C.
Littelfuse: www.littelfuse.com.
2.02 FUSES - GENERAL
A.
Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
B.
Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.
C.
Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
D.
Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
E.
Other Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: L time delay.
F.
Other Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
G.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class L time delay.
Job #09270
FUSES
26 28 13 - Page 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
END OF SECTION
FUSES
26 28 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 26 28 18
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Fusible switches.
B.
Nonfusible switches.
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A.
Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.
A.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007).
B.
C.
D.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer: www.eatonelectrical.com.
B.
Square D: www.squared.com.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.
B.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C.
Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
Job #09270
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 18 - Page 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C.
Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.
A.
Perform field inspection in accordance with Construction Manager's General Requirements.
B.
C.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.2.
END OF SECTION
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 18 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 26 29 13
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Manual motor controllers.
B.
Magnetic motor controllers.
C.
Combination magnetic motor controllers and disconnects.
D.
Motor control centers.
A.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Engraved nameplates.
B.
Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.
A.
ANSI/IEEE 344 - Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear
Power Generating Stations.
B.
ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current-Limiting Types.
C.
D.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
E.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not
More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005).
F.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; National Electrical
G.
NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
1993 (R2006).
H.
I.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
J.
NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600
Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
K.
L.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of motor control center enclosures with overall dimensions.
Include conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per
phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand
ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
C.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and
overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.
Job #09270
26 29 13 - Page 1
D.
Maintenance Data: Replacement parts list for controllers.
A.
Deliver in 60 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection, and mounted on
shipping skids.
B.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy
plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose.
Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish.
A.
B.
with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
C.
indicated.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A.
Keys: Furnish 1 set each to Owner.
B.
Fuses: Furnish to Owner 1 set spare fuses of each type and rating installed.
C.
Fuse Pullers: Furnish one fuse puller to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer: www.eatonelectrical.com.
B.
GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com.
C.
Siemens AG: www.siemens.com.
D.
Square D: www.squared.com.
2.02 MANUAL CONTROLLERS
A.
Manual Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage
controller with overload element, NO auxiliary contact, and toggle operator.
B.
Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated,
full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light,
and toggle operator.
C.
Motor Starting Switches: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage
controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and
toggle operator.
D.
Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
2.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A.
Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction
motors rated in horsepower.
B.
FullVoltage Starting: Non-reversing type.
C.
Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
D.
Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2; melting alloy.
26 29 13 - Page 2
Job #09270
E.
Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 normally open contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
B.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard duty oiltight type.
C.
Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150.
D.
Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
E.
Indicating Lights: Transformer, incandescent type.
F.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
G.
Relays: NEMA ICS 2, as specified on Drawings.
H.
Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, as scheduled. Provide fused primary, secondary, and
bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
2.05 COMBINATION STARTERS
A.
All combination starters shall use a unit disconnect.
B.
All starters shall use NEMA/EEMAC-rated contactors. Starters shall be provided with 3-pole, external
manual reset, overload relay thermal overload units.
C.
When provided, control circuit transformers shall include internal primary protection 280 volt to 480 volt
(separate primary fuse on 600 volts), and one secondary fuse (in non-ground secondary conductor).
Transformer shall be sized to accommodate contactor(s) and all connected control circuit loads.
Transformer rating shall be fully visible from front when unit door is open.
D.
When a unit control circuit transformer is not provided, disconnect shall include an electrical interlock for
disconnection of externally powered control circuits.
E.
Auxiliary control circuit interlocks shall be provided where indicated. Auxiliary interlocks shall be field
convertible to normally open or normally closed operation.
F.
NEMA/EEMAC Size 1-4 starters shall be mounted directly adjacent to wireway so that power wiring (motor
leads) shall connect directly to starter terminals without use of interposing terminals. Larger starters shall
be arranged so that power wiring may exit through bottom of starter cubical without entering vertical
wireway.
2.06 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A.
Motor Control Centers: NEMA ICS 2.
B.
Main Overcurrent Protection: As scheduled.
C.
Motor Starters: As scheduled.
D.
Feeder Tap Units: As scheduled.
E.
Voltage Rating: As scheduled.
F.
Horizontal Bussing: Copper, with a continuous current rating of 600 ampereInclude copper ground bus
entire length of control center.
G.
Vertical Bussing: NEMA ICS 2; copper.
H.
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 480 volts.
I.
Configuration: Units front mounting only, accessible from the [front only.
J.
Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.
K.
Finish: [Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
Job #09270
26 29 13 - Page 3
L.
Provide phase loss protection relay with contacts to de-energize each motor starter in control center.
M. Control Transformer: Provide kVA control transformer in motor control center to provide [120] [ ] volt
control source for all motor starters in control center.
N.
Seismic Requirements: ANSI/IEEE 344; Class I.
2.07 DISCONNECTS
A.
Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnects in common enclosure. Obtain IEC
Class 2 coordinated component protection.
B.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL listed.
C.
Motor Circuit Protector: Circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL listed.
D.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle.
E.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse
clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
C.
Provide supports as required.
D.
Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
E.
Provide fuses for fusible switches.
F.
Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics.
G.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates; refer to Section 26 05 53 for product requirements and location.
H.
Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load
amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place label in clear plastic holder.
A.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.16.2.
END OF SECTION
26 29 13 - Page 4
Job #09270
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Interior luminaires.
B.
Emergency lighting units.
C.
Exit signs.
D.
Ballasts.
E.
Fluorescent emergency power supply units.
F.
Lamps.
G.
Luminaire accessories.
A.
B.
C.
Section 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy sensors
and outdoor photo controls.
D.
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.
A.
NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
B.
NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical
C.
NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
D.
E.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection
Association; 2009.
F.
UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each fixture that is not a standard product of the
manufacturer.
C.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service
conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number
nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.
D.
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of product.
Job #09270
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 1
A.
B.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA
502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - See Schedule on Drawings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C.
Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,
reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and
distribute the light.
F.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors,
hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.
G.
Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage,
distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A.
Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes,
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
B.
Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage
drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for
minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon
restoration of normal power source.
C.
Battery:
1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated.
D.
Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate
emergency operation.
E.
Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.
2.04 EXIT SIGNS - See schedule on Drawings.
A.
All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and
all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.
2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.
2.05 BALLASTS
A.
All Ballasts:
1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
2.
Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state
ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.
2.06 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS
A.
Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated
luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 924.
B.
Compatibility:
1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts,
including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.
C.
Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches connected
lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency
illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.
D.
Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to
display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation.
2.07 LAMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com.
3. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.
B.
All Lamps:
1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.
2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified,
provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp
efficiency standards.
4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products
which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Design
Professional to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.
C.
Lamp Types: As specified for each fixture.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of
luminaires provided under this section.
B.
Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general
workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D.
Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
E.
Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting)
and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
F.
Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide
pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
G.
Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
H.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
Job #09270
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 3
I.
Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each
other. Secure to prevent movement.
J.
Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires in grid ceiling directly from building structure.
K.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
L.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for
fire rating.
M. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
N.
Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.
O.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
P.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit.
Q.
Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided using flexible conduit.
R.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within luminaire.
S.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
T.
Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
U.
Emergency Lighting Units:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting
in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
V.
Exit Signs:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting
in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
W. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units:
1. For field-installed units, install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated. Where installation inside
luminaire is not possible, install on top of luminaire.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal
ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
X.
Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
Y.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
A.
See Construction Manager's General Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.
Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C.
Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 10 00 and Section 26 00 00.
D.
Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
E.
Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to
verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.
F.
Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace
excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Design Professional.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Design
Professional. Secure locking fittings in place.
B.
Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path
as required or as directed by Design Professional or authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate
egress path as directed by Design Professional or authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Aim and adjust luminaires as directed by Design Professional and in accordance with all codes.
E.
Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and
manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to
match original factory finish.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Design Professional and Owner, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
B.
Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.
3.06 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - Page 5
SECTION 26 52 01
EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Emergency lighting units.
B.
Emergency exit signs.
C.
Emergency fluorescent lamp power supplies.
A.
Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and structure.
B.
NEMA WD1 - General - Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on emergency lighting units, exit signs, and emergency fluorescent lamp power
supply units.
A.
Conform to NFPA 101 for installation requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 INCANDESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A.
Emergency Lighting Unit: Self contained unit with self diagnostics rechargeable storage batteries, charger,
and lamps.
B.
Battery: 12 volt, nickel-cadmium type, with 1.5 hour capacity to supply the connected lamp load.
C.
Charger: Dual-rate charger, capable of maintaining the battery in a full-charge state during normal
conditions, and capable of recharging discharged battery to full charge within 12 hours.
D.
Lamps: Per Schedule
E.
Remote Lamps: Match lamps on unit.
F.
Indicators: Provide lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.
G.
Provide switch to transfer unit from normal supply to battery supply.
H.
Electrical Connection: Knockout for conduit connection.
I.
Unit Voltage: 120/277 volts, AC.
2.02 SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY POWER EXIT SIGNS
A.
Type: Exit signs with integral battery-operated emergency power supply, including power failure relay, self
diagnostics, AC ON pilot light, battery, and full-automatic two-rate charger.
B.
Battery: Nickel cadmium, requiring no maintenance or replacement for 10 years under normal conditions.
Job #09270
26 52 01 - Page 1
2.03 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LAMP POWER SUPPLY
A.
Unit: Self-contained, with automatic transfer to battery supply on power failure, including self diagnostics,
AC ON pilot light, full-automatic two-rate charger, battery and power supply capable of operating a F32TB
lamp with a minimum output of 1400 lumens.
B.
Battery: Nickel cadmium, requiring no maintenance or replacement for 10 years under normal conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units plumb and level.
B.
Aim directional lampheads as directed.
END OF SECTION
26 52 01 - Page 2
Job #09270
SECTION 27 10 01
COMMUNICATION AND DATA-PROCESSING CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Wire, cable, connecting devices, installation, and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways
for voice and high-speed data transmission.
A.
B.
C.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E814, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
B.
UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire-stops
C.
UL Fire Resistance Directory: Through Penetration Fire-Stop Devices (XHCR) and Through Penetration
Fire-stop Systems
D.
ASTM E 119, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials (for fire-rated architectural barriers).
E.
2002 NFPA National Electrical Code, Section 800-52, Paragraph 2(B), Spread of Fire Products of
Combustion
F.
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568, Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling, Section
5, Clause 5.1 through 5.2.3, Fire-stopping
G.
2003 (10th) edition of the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, Chapter 15,
Fire-stopping
H.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
C.
LAN: Local area network.
D.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
E.
STP: Shielded twisted pair.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component specified.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components. Show access and
workspace requirements.
D.
Complete materials list including manufacturer's product data specification sheets and a schematic diagram
illustrating the entire system installation at all buildings.
Job #09270
27 10 01 - Page 1
E.
System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as specified in Part 3, in
software and format selected by Owner.
F.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
G.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide evidence of
applicable registration or certification.
H.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
I.
Maintenance Data: For products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A.
Perform Work in accordance with all local codes and National Electrical Code (NEC).
B.
Entire system shall be a standard product of one manufacturer and shall be complete in all respects.
C.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is a registered communication distribution designer
certified by the Building Industry Consulting Service International.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F.
Provide Panduit 25 year4 warranty, to be provided yb Certified panduit Installer. Submit certification data.
1.07 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
All materials used on this project shall be new and delivered to the sitre in the original manufacturer's
packaging.
1. Used and refurbished equipment is not permitted.
A.
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling all dfeliveries and providing proper receipt, handling and
storage of all materials.
B.
Protect all equipment from physical damages (dents, scratches, dust, water, paint, chemicals and
temperature extremes) and vandalism or theft.
C.
The Contractor shall replace any damaged or stolen equipment and materials at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.09 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide and install per drawings. Contractor is responsible for all cable, faceplates, jacks, patch panels, wire
management, j-hooks and miscellaneous components for a complete system.
1.10 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Work of this Section with Owner's workstation, and LAN equipment suppliers.
B.
Meet jointly with representatives of above organizations and Owner's representatives to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
C.
Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
D.
Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in equipment
rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of LAN
equipment.
27 10 01 - Page 2
Job #09270
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Voice/Data Cabling and Connectivity
1. Cat 5e Cable - 350 MHz minimum.
2. Cat 5e Jack - Panduit CJ5E88TGxx
3. Faceplate - Panduit CFPLxIWY
4. Patch Panel - Panduit DP245E88TGY
5. Wire Management - Panduit CMPH2
2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B.
Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in
patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in backbone cable trays and wireways to
accommodate 20 percent future increase in active workstations.
2.03 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A.
Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Section 26 05 34 - Conduit and Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.
B.
Backboards: 3/4-inch interior-grade, fire-resistive-treated plywood.
2.04 TWISTED-PAIR CABLES, CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Listed as complying with Categories 5 of EIA/TIA-568-B.
B.
Conductors: Solid copper.
C.
UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with EIA/TIA-568-B for connectors, plugs, and jack assemblies.
D.
Cross-Connect Panel: IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection
between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
2. Mounting: Rack as indicated.
3. Patch Panel: Punchdown patch panels housing multiple, numbered jack units with IDC-type
connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
a. Mounting: Rack as indicated.
4. Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle units with integral
IDC-type terminals.
5. UTP Patch Cords: Two-pair cables in 48-inch lengths, terminated with UTP plug connectors at both
ends. Match plug connectors with patch-panel connectors.
6. Workstation Outlets: Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single or multigang faceplate.
a. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color to match adjacent device coverplates.
c. Data jack shall be orange in color.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with Section 26 05 53 and the following:
1. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with
alphanumeric cable designations.
Job #09270
27 10 01 - Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other
conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A.
Horizontal Cables for Data Service: Use UTP cable complying with Category 5e of EIA/TIA-568-B,
fiber-optic cable for runs between rack and workstation outlets.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
All cable shall be installed in accordance with BICSI standards. Contractor All permits required for the
installation are the responsibility of this contractor and should be included in the total bid. J hooks will be
installed at intervals of five feet and shall be secured to the building structure. All boxes will be roughed in
by electrical contractor. System will be installed per electrical code.
B.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where cable wiring method
may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal
raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
C.
Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5e rating of
components and that ensure Category 5e performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.
D.
Install cable without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
E.
Do not bend cable in handling or in installing to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
F.
Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.
1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not damage conductor or
insulation.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage media or raceway.
4. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
5. Secure and support cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from
cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
6. Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Train
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars to restrain cables to prevent straining
connections and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
7. Separation of Wires: Comply with EIA/TIA-569 rules for separating unshielded copper communication
and data processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment.
8. Make splices, taps and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals and cross-connect and patch
panels.
9. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with media types.
3.04 GROUNDING
A.
Comply with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Equipment.
B.
Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
C.
Provide grounding bus bar in Data Rack.
27 10 01 - Page 4
Job #09270
1.
#6 Copper grounding cable routed to building ground.
3.05 INSTALLATION IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND WIRING CLOSETS
A.
Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
C.
Use patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, unless otherwise indicated.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components complying with applicable requirements in Section 26 05 53 and the following
Specifications.
B.
System: Use a unique, three-syllable alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks,
connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic
designations for facility's architectural arrangement.
1. First syllable identifies and locates wiring closet or equipment room where cable originates.
2. Second syllable identifies and locates cross-connect or patch-panel field in which cable terminates.
3. Third syllable designates type of media (copper or fiber) and position occupied by cable pairs or fibers
in the field.
4. Workstation: Label cables within outlet boxes.
5. Distribution Racks and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit.
6. Cables, General: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible
in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
7. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not
exceeding 15 feet.
A.
Testing: On installation of cable and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed.
Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.
B.
Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity
and shorts. Use Class 2 bidirectional Category 5e tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and
terminations. Test according to EIA/TIA-TSB 67, "Transmission Performance Specifications for Field
Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems." Link performance for UTP cables must meet
minimum criteria of EIA/TIA-568-A.
C.
Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
D.
Provide printed and electronic copies of test reports to Design Professional and Owner.
3.08 CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove
burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A.
Schedule training with Owner, through General Contractor, with at least seven days' advance notice.
B.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain systems.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
2. Train designated personnel in cable management operations, including changing signal pathways for
different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and extending wiring to establish new
workstation outlets.
Job #09270
27 10 01 - Page 5
END OF SECTION
27 10 01 - Page 6
Job #09270
SECTION 27 51 17
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Speakers.
B.
Sound system cable.
A.
B.
Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports.
C.
Section 26 05 34 - Conduit.
D.
A.
A.
Addition to existing sound system in the Genesee County Friend of the Court Offices, consisting of ceiling
speakers and cabling.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate layout of
component interconnecting wiring, and wiring diagrams of field wiring to speakers.
C.
Product Data: Provide data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each
component.
D.
Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of each test recommended by the manufacturer.
E.
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of product.
F.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of speakers, control equipment, and outlets for
input/output connectors.
G.
Operation Data: Include instructions for adjusting, operating, and extending the system.
H.
Maintenance Data: Include repair procedures and spare parts documentation.
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and Federal Communications Commission.
B.
with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
C.
Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
documented experience.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles
of Project.
Job #09270
27 51 17 - Page 1
E.
Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Furnish service and maintenance for the new components of public address and music system for one year
from Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A.
Ceiling Speakers: Quam Solution 2
B.
Cable: West Penn #25-224
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Mounting Heights: Coordinate locations of outlet boxes specified in Section 26 05 37 to obtain mounting
heights indicated.
C.
Splice cable only in accessible junction boxes or at terminal block units.
D.
Make cable shields continuous at splices and connect speaker circuit shield to equipment ground only at
amplifier.
E.
Install input circuits in separate cables and raceways from output circuits.
F.
Leave 18 inches excess cable at each termination at microphone, volume pad, speaker, and other system
outlet.
G.
Leave 6 feet excess cable at each termination at system cabinet
H.
Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
I.
Use armored cable for outside speaker circuits.
J.
Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips
or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure for ceiling suspension system. Include bridle rings or
drive rings.
K.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
L.
Connect reproducers to amplifier with matching transformers.
M. Install equipment racks in location shown; arrange to provide adequate ventilation and access.
N.
Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
A.
Provide the services of manufacturer's technical representative to prepare and start system.
1. Include making of final wiring connections, inspection and adjusting of completed installation, and
systems demonstration.
2. Certify that installation is complete and performs according to specified requirements.
B.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Condstruction Manager's General Requirements.
C.
Measure and record sound power levels at designated locations.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Provide the services of manufacturer's technical representative to prepare and start system.
27 51 17 - Page 2
Job #09270
B.
Include supervising final wiring connections, inspection and adjusting of completed installation, and systems
demonstration.
C.
Certify that installation is complete and performs according to specified requirements.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust transformer taps for appropriate sound level.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.
2. Conduct walking tour of project.
3. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.
B.
Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training
materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of one day of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.
4. Location: At project site.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.
B.
Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
END OF SECTION
Job #09270
27 51 17 - Page 3
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Fire alarm system modification and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit.
B.
Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit indicated.
C.
Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period.
A.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Materials and methods for work to be performed by this installer.
B.
A.
IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)
AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008).
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C.
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code; 2010.
D.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
1. Contractor to verify most recent adopted edition for this use group.
E.
NFPA 601 - Standard for Security Services in Fire Loss Prevention; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Drawings must be prepared as DXF-format CAD drawings.
1. Owner will provide floor plan drawings for Contractor's use; verify all floor plan dimensions on
Owner-provided drawings.
C.
Evidence of designer qualifications.
D.
Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having
jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation:
1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72
Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required.
4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.
5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control
unit programming.
6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare
capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations.
7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.
8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation
instructions, and circuit length limitations.
9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating
adequate battery power.
10. Detailed drawing of graphic annunciator(s).
11. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other
component that the components are compatible with the control unit.
Job #09270
28 31 00 - Page 1
12. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract
documents.
13. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents.
14. Do not show existing components to be removed.
E.
Evidence of installer qualifications.
F.
Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline.
G.
Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.
H.
Inspection and Test Reports:
1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.
2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.
3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.
I.
Operating and Maintenance Data:Have one set available during closeout demonstration:
1. Original copy of NFPA 72 with portions that are not relevant to this project neatly crossed out by hand;
label with project name and date.
2. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction.
3. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same
manuals.
4. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service.
5. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing.
6. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply.
7. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.
8. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed
copy and computer format acceptable to Owner.
9. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative
personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and
when entering into contracts for remodeling.
J.
Project Record Documents:
1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones.
2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications.
3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart,
and voice messages by event.
K.
Closeout Documents:
1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation
requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized
representative of authority having jurisdiction.
3. Certificate of Occupancy.
4. Maintenance contract.
5. Report on training results.
L.
Maintenance Materials, Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Furnish spare parts of same manufacturer and model as those installed; deliver in original packaging,
labeled in same manner as in operating and maintenance data and place in spare parts cabinet.
3. In addition to the items in quantities indicated in PART 2, furnish the following:
a. All tools, software, and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system using Owner's
personnel; minimum modification capability to include addition and deletion of devices, circuits,
and zones, and changes to system description, operation, and evacuation and instructional
messages.
b. One copy, on CD-ROM, of all software not resident in read-only-memory.
c. Extra Fuses: Two for each installed fuse; store inside applicable control cabinet.
28 31 00 - Page 2
Job #09270
A.
Copies of Design Criteria Documents: Maintain at the project site for the duration of the project, bound
together, an original copy of NFPA 72, the relevant portions of applicable codes, and instructions and
guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction; deliver to Owner upon completion.
B.
Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire
protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of
the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business.
1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer
is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification.
2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems.
3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address.
4. Contract maintenance office located within 50 miles of project site.
5. Licensed in the State of Michigan as fire alarm installer.
D.
Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified
qualifications.
E.
Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory, and able to
provide the required training; trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are free
from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances:
1. General Electric/Edwards UTC: www.edwardsutcfs.com..
2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A.
Fire Alarm System: Existing automatic fire detection and alarm system is a Honeywell Security and Fire
Solutions system.
1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not.
2. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as
listed:
a. The Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshal.
c. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction.
d. Applicable local codes.
e. The contract documents (drawings and specifications).
f.
NFPA 101.
g. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts
between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design
documents.
3. Evacuation Alarm:General evacuation of entire premises.
4. Combined Systems: Do not combine fire alarm system with other non-fire systems.
B.
Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections:
1. Remote Supervising Station: UL-listed central station under contract to facility.
Job #09270
28 31 00 - Page 3
2.
Auxiliary Connection Type: Parallel telephone.
C.
Spare Capacity:
1. Initiating Device Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
2. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
3. Master Control Unit: Capable of handling all circuits utilized to capacity without requiring additional
components other than plug-in control modules.
D.
Power Sources:
1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system.
2. Secondary: Storage batteries.
3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72.
2.03 EXISTING COMPONENTS
A.
Existing Fire Alarm System: Remove existing components in area being remodeled.
B.
Supervising Station: Include as part of this work all modifications necessary to existing supervising station
to accommodate new fire alarm work.
C.
Clearly label components that are "Not In Service."
D.
Remove unused existing components and materials from site and dispose of properly.
2.04 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES
A.
Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:
1. Duct smoke detectors.
B.
HVAC:
1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Shut down air handlers indicated.
C.
Doors:
1. Existing Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in zone on either side of
door and upon alarm from manual pull station.
2. Existing Electromagnetic Door Locks on Egress Doors: Unlock upon activation of any alarm initiating
device.
3. Existing Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in zone on
either side of door and upon alarm from manual pull station.
2.05 COMPONENTS
A.
General:
1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit
are acceptable; See Details on Drawings.
2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and
maintenance data.
B.
Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Analog, addressable type; listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.
Remote Power Supplies:
1. General Electric/Edwards UTC #BPS10A.
D.
Initiating Devices:
1. Smoke Detectors: Match Existing System.
E.
Notification Appliances:
1. Audio/Visual Devices: General Electric/Edwards UTC #G1RF-CVM (Where surface-mounted, provide
matching red surface box).
a. Provide 5 extra.
2. Visual Units: General Electric/Edwards UTC #G1RF-VM. (Where surface-mounted, provide matching
red surface box).
28 31 00 - Page 4
Job #09270
a.
Provide 2 extra.
F.
Circuit Conductors: Copper; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label.
G.
Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70;
1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac),
line-to-neutral, and 350 V(ac), line-to-line; do not use fuses.
2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge
protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to protect applicable equipment;
for 24 V(dc) maximum dc clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line-to-ground, and 72 V(dc), line-to-line.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building,
rated to protect applicable equipment.
H.
Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner.
1. Provide the same standard lock and key for each key operated switch and lockable panel and cabinet;
provide 5 keys of each type
I.
Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is
received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station.
1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover.
2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed.
3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner.
4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal.
J.
Storage Cabinet for Spare Parts and Tools: Steel with baked enamel finish, size appropriate to quantity of
parts and tools.
1. Padlock eye and hasp for lock furnished by Owner.
2. Locate as directed by Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents.
B.
Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas.
C.
Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation.
D.
Install instruction cards and labels.
3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION
A.
Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.
B.
Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests
and for observation by their personnel.
C.
Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise
inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments.
D.
Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required.
E.
Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.
F.
Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document
each inspection and test.
G.
Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract
documents.
H.
Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode
for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions.
1. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction.
Job #09270
28 31 00 - Page 5
3.
At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form."
3.03 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION
A.
Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel:
1. Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system.
2. Record: The installer shall video record the entire instructional session and submit the recording to the
Owner on a compact disc.
3.04 CLOSEOUT
A.
Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner.
1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, copy of project record drawings,
input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration.
3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration.
4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction;
notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration.
5. Repeat demonstration until successful.
B.
Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and:
1. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed.
2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered.
3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered.
4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner.
5. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Occupancy permit has been granted.
7. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - General Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.
B.
Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty period,
to include the work described below.
C.
Provide to Owner, a proposal for a maintenance contract for entire warranty period, to include the work
described below; include the total cost of contract, proposal to be valid at least until 30 days after date of
Substantial Completion.
D.
Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including:
1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system.
2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the
maintenance contractor.
3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning,
inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
END OF SECTION
28 31 00 - Page 6
Job #09270

instructions to bidders

Transcription

Similar documents

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

How to Open an Account with Great Lakes Credit Union (GLCU)

Pharmaceutical Facility Process Piping Installation

PARISPROGRAM October 22n 19B3. D150O3SIOK WITH VR. TITO

Pegasus final w industries

Pegasus Summary offset copy

Film Idea for Simon Rodia and His Towers at Watts by

Swatchcard - National Office Furniture

Regions CD Check Viewer Installation Guide